Home

Samsung ProXpress

1. Duplex 2 gt 1 Sided AA AA BB A gt A B e Off Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages 2 51 Sided Rotated T 5 3 3 Ki gt AC a 2 52 Sided Layout Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy 2 4 up etc A At 3 Useful Setting Menus 223 Copy Item Adjust Background Description Item Prints an image without its background This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog e Off Does not use this feature e Auto Optimizes the background e Enhance Lev 1 2 The higher the number is the more vivid the background is Erase Lev 1 4 The higher the number is the lighter Edge Erase the background is Description Allows you to erase spots drill holes fold creases and staple marks along any of the four edges of a document e Off Does not use this feature SmallOriginal rases the edge of the original if it is small This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass e Hole Punch Erases the marks of bookbinding holes Book Center Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and horizontal when you c
2. e Reverse Double Sided Printing Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing Paper Options I gt 9 Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the document 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document a _ ae a To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences Watermark Creating a watermark b Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window A Watermark Editing a watermark To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options Click Update to save the change
3. 7 Press Start Your machine begins scanning the back side 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic scanning For special scanning features refer to the Advanced Guide see Scan 2 If you see Not Available message check the port connection or select features on page 285 Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt i 73 Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings asic gt cannin g For the model with a touch screen press Next gt select the scan destination you want on the touch screen This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals This is a basic scanning method for USB connected machine 2 You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list Also you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different path e To change the scan destination go to Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt KA e Accessing menus may differ from model to model e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for sbe madel 4 Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings e Ifyou want to scan using the network refer to the Advanced Guide see Scanning from network connected machine on page 286 4 Select the option you want and press OK For the model with a touch screen press BEEJ Option settings gt 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the
4. 1 Document feeder cover 14 Output support tray 2 Document feeder width guide 15 Output tray 3 Document feeder input tray 16 Scanner glass 4 Document feeder support tray 17 Scanner lid 5 Document feeder output tray 18 Front cover handle 6 19 Paper width guides on a multi Control panel f purpose tray 7 Control board cover 20 Multi purpose support tray 8 21 Paper width guides on a manual Front cover feeder tray 9 Paper level indicator 22 Toner cartridge 10 Tray 2 23 Toner cartridge 11 Tray1 24 Imaging unit 12 Multi purpose or manual feeder 25 Handset tray 13 USB memory port 26 Card reader holder9 a M337x series only b c d e f g M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series This is an optional feature see Various features on page 10 M3375 M3875 M4075 series Handset model only see Various features on page 10 M387x M407x series only M407xFX only 1 Introduction lan Machine overview Rear view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model There are various types of machine Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8 1 EDI port for card reader 6 Power receptacle 2 Network port 7 Telephone line socket LINE 3 USB port 8 Extension telephone socket EXT 4 5V output port for I
5. 5 Fax pa Switches to Fax mode 6 Arrows Scroll through the options available in the selected menu and increase or decrease values 7 OK Confirms the selection on the screen 8 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters see Understanding keypad on page 261 9 Address Book Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers see Storing email address on page 259 or Setting up the address book on page 263 10 Redial Pause Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode or inserts a pause into a fax number in edit mode see Redialing the fax number on page 297 11 Stops current operation Stop Clear pogi oe 12 Power Wake Turns the power on or off or wakes up the machine from the power save mode If you need to turn the machine off press this button for Up more than three seconds 13 Start Starts a job 14 Power Saver Goes into sleep mode 89 OOO O O 15 On Hook Dial When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone 16 Back Sends you back to the upper menu level 17 Menu a Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus see Menu overview on page 32 18 Switches to Scan mode Scan 19 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine see Understanding the status LED on page 134 20 You can reduce or enlarge the siz
6. Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or 24 hr models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on E Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving mode page 32 This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of To change the menu options your machine You can receive a fax from someone you Receive Code are talking to on the extension telephone without going e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup on the control panel to the fax machine 9 is the remote receive code preset h Paih h at the factory see Receiving faxes with an extension e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt telephone on page 304 Next gt Initial Setup on the touch screen Select Country Selects the country e For the model with a touch screen press o Setup 5 Machine Setup 5 Na naa Sets the sound volume option see Sound Volume on Next 5 select the menu item you want on the touch screen ound Volume page 244 For the model with a touch screen press o Setup on the touch screen You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the Image Overwrite memory The machine overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery Item Description Sets the language of the text that appears on the control Machine ID Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of
7. Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment percentage of image area printing interval graphics media and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing b Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country see Control panel overview on page 23 c When the imaging unit has reached its end of life the machine will stop printing In this case you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru Web Service Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup gt Supplies Management gt Imaging Unit Stop or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt System gt Supplies Management gt Imaging Unit Stop Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device s system 4 Troubleshooting 136 Understanding display messages Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and correct the problem if necessary 2 You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers s Printing Status program window see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 324 Ifa message is not in the table reboot the power a
8. 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview Basic Copy WEN Option settings Darkness Original Type Custom Copy WEN Option settings Duplex Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Size Original Type Paper Source Auto Tray1 Tray2 MP Tray a This is an optional feature F Copy see Copy on page 222 Collation WaterMark Layout ID Copy Normal WET Option settings oe Darkness TUP Original Type IP SOpy Auto Fit Copy Book Copy Adjust Background BEER Option settings Edge Erase Darkness Off Original Type Small Original Hole Punch Book Center Border Erase Stamp Stamp Activate Item Opacity Position b This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy N Up Copy BEB Option settings N Up Original Orientation Duplex Darkness Original Size Original Type Book Copy BEB Option settings Book Copy Darkness Original Size Original Type 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI Menu overview Local PC Destination WEN Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness Network PC Select User WEN Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness Email To BEB Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF Duplex Darkness File N
9. The optional tray is not selected in the driver The printer driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Options tab and set the tray option see Setting Device Options on page 101 When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader 6 Troubleshooting 360 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center Country Region 0800 100 100 Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite 051 133 1999 ALGERIA NAA samsung cont n_africa ANGOLA 91 726 7864 www samsung com ARGENTINA 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 www samsung com AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au AUSTRIA 081 Hina NG 7267864 E www samsung com 0 07 min AZERBAIJAN 088 55 55 555 www samsung com 8000 4726 www samsung com ae English BAHRAIN www samsung com ae_ar Arabic BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung com 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be Dutch BELGIUM www samsung com be_fr French BOLIVIA www samsung com
10. e Available for Windows OS users only see Software on page 8 5 Error Themacdhinehasai easton eito Samsung I rinter status Samsung Printer Status overview If an error occurs while operating you can check the error from the Samsung Printer Status Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually Go to the Printing Preferences click the Basic tab gt Printer Status button 4 These icons appear on the Windows task bar Jl Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge The machine and the number of 1 toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use Some machines do not have this feature 5 Useful Management Tools 324 Using Samsung Printer Status 2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings 3 Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide KA This button opens the Troubleshooting a Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide 5 Close Close the window 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location You 2 The scre
11. appear Fail To Print A printer These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in ready timeout error occurred mode or after printing has completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred message appear Samsung Printer Experience is Samsung Printer Experience is not installed Download the app from the Windows Store and install it not shown when you click more settings Machine information is not Check the Printer properties Click the Ports tab displayed when you click the device in the Devices and Printers Control Panel gt Devices and Printers gt Right click on your printer icon and select Printer properties If the port is set to File or LPT uncheck them and select TCP IP USB or WSD WU Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages 6 Troubleshooting 356 Operating system problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing K It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Some letters are not displayed normally Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the c
12. 1 Select Menu gt System Setup gt Paper Setup gt Paper Size or Paper Type on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Paper Setup gt select a tray gt Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen 2 Select the tray and the option you want 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray Using the output support Ifmorethan 50 pages one sided of Legal paper is stacked in the output y tray paper can be mis aligned or paper jams can occur Do not let paper to stack up in the output tray e When printing on thick paper paper may not properly align on the output support Close the output support or turn the paper over in the tray before printing A The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it The printed pages stack on the output support and the output support will help the printed pages to align Unfold the output support 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 58 Media and tray Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm 5 6 x 5 8 inches or larger than You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches copying scanning and sending a fax Do not attempt to load the following s of paper in order to prevent paper Jam lowprint qualit
13. Authentication Open System Shared Key WPA Enterprise Personal WPA2 Enterprise Personal Encryption WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES 5 Appendix 151 Regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements Laser safety statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 2007 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Warning Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons DANGER VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION PERIGO GEVAAR ADVARSEL ADVARSEL VARNING VAROITUS RK xz T CAUTION CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN D D R R E K G KI U KLASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL A K LI AVATTUNA V LT ALTISTUMISTA S TEELLE
14. Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable 2 e The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet If not you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update e You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store 1 From Charms select Search 2 Click Store 3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience 4 Click Install 1 Introduction 29 Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to reinstall 4 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive and install the driver the driver again see Installing the driver locally on page 28 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Uninstall Samsung Printer Software From the Windows 8 Start Screen For Windows 8 tak 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and 1 From Charms select Search gt Apps powered on Search and click Control Panel 2 Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start Click Programs and Features screen 2 3 4 Right click the driver you want to uninstall and select
15. Fax features Press OK when Yes highlights For the model with a touch screen press Yes when the confirmation windows appears Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home gy icon to return to ready mode Forwarding a sent fax to another destination You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax an email or a server If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful 9 e When you forward a fax by an email you must first set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Though you sent or received a color fax the data is forwarded in grayscale Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder Press Pi fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Send Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen press g Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Send Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 Enter the destination fax number email address or server address and press OK For the model with a touch screen turn this option On and then enter the forward number Press
16. ID admin Password sec00000 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens move the mouse cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network Settings Click TCP IPv6 on the left pane of the website Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6 Click the Apply button Turn the machine off and turn it on again L You can also set the DHCPv6 e To manually set the IPv6 address Check the Manual Address check box Then the Address Prefix text box is activated Enter the rest of the address e g 3FFE 10 88 194 AAAA A is the hexadecimal 0 through 9 A through F IPv6 address configuration 1 2 3 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL Select one of the IPv6 addresses Link local Address Stateless Address Stateful Address Manual Address from Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 Link local Address Self configured local IPv6 address Address starts with FE80 Stateless Address Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router Stateful Address IPv6 address configured by a DHCPV6 server Manual Address Manually configured IPv6 address by a user Enter the IPv6 addresses e g http FE80 215 99FF FE66 7701 A Address must be enclosed in brackets 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 189 Wireless network setup KA e Make sure your machine
17. v lt share name gt or V lt share name gt Shares installed machine and add other available platform drivers for Point amp Print It will install all supported Windows OS platform s machine drivers to system and share it with specified lt share name gt for point and print oor O Opens Printers and Faxes folder after installation This command will open Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation Command line on Definition Description Shows Command line Usage Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop e For Mac OS X 10 8 double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder 5 Click Continue Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon Read the license agreement and click Continue 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 182 Installing driver over the network 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install Enter the password and click OK Select Network Connected Printer Wired or Wireless on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to you
18. 800 10 7260 BOSNIA www samsung com BOTSWANA 8007260000 www samsung com 0800 124 421 Demais cidadese www samsung com br regides BRAZIL 4004 0000 Capitais e grandes centros BULGARIA 07001 33 11 share cost tariff www samsung com bg BURUNDI 200 www samsung com CAMEROON 7095 0077 aa africa_fr 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ca English CANADA www samsung com ca_fr French G 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com cl HILE HHP 02 24828200 CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com 01 8000112112 www samsung com co COLOMBIA Bogota 6001272 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 361 i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com 800 6225 www samsung com latin Spanish latin Spanish COSTA RICA EL SALVADOR www samsung com www samsung com latin_en English latin_en English CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG 062 726 786 www samsung com hr ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee Pee 8000 0077 www samsung com FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com Cote D Ivoire africa_fr FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com fr CYPRUS 8009 4000 only from landline www samsung com gr 0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw www samsung com DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com GERMANY HHP 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com 0180 6 67267864 0 20 Anruf latin Spanish au
19. Clearing jams Clearing original document jams KU To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper originals A To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and carefully 4 Troubleshooting 128 Clearing jams Original paper jam in front of scanner F Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 4 Troubleshooting 129 Clearing jams Original paper jam inside of scanner Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page y 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 4 Troubleshooting 130 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting 131 Clearing jams Original paper jam in exit area of scanner F Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 4 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or option
20. KA You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self on page 316 option in the Settings gt Scan gt Scan To E mail on SyncThru Web Service 2 Select Address Book gt Individual gt Add 3 Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB 4 Special Features Scan features 4 5 2 10 Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 Check the box next to Anonymous then the server permits the access of unauthorized people Enter the login name and password Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB server Enter the path for saving the scanned image The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root The folder properties need to be setup as a share Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder Press Apply Scanning and sending to FTP SMB server Make sure that your machine is connected to a network Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 N Select Iscan gt Scan to SMB or Scan to FTP on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select rx Scan 5 SMB or FTP 5 Next gt select the scan destination you want on the touch screen Select a server and scan forma
21. Key Sound Description Turns the key sound on or off A tone sounds each time a key is pressed if this option is on Alarm Sound Turns the alarm sound on or off An alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this option is on 3 Useful Setting Menus 244 System setup Item Speaker Volume Description Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line through the speaker such as a dial tone or a fax tone With this option set to Comm which means the speaker is on until the remote machine answers 9 You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial You can adjust the speaker volume only when the telephone line is connected a Press Lifa on the control panel b Press On Hook Dial A dial tone sounds from the speaker c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you want d Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode Dial Tone Volume Adjusts the dial tone volume You can select different levels K Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or page 32 To change the menu options models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Report on the control panel e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup Next 5 Reports on the touch screen Item Configuration Description Prints a report on the machine s overall configurat
22. Paper feeding problems 337 Power and cable connecting problems 338 Printing problems 339 Printing quality problems 343 Copying problems 351 Scanning problems 352 Faxing problems 354 Operating system problems 356 WA For errors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings refer to the troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter see Troubleshooting for wireless network on page 211 Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing Clear the paper jam Paper sticks together e Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight Paper does not feed into the machine e Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine The paper keeps jamming e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the manual feeding in tray e
23. Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Wrinkles or creases e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray AaBbCc AaBbCc Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 Back of printouts are dirty Solid color or black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 The machine may require repairing Contact a service representative 6 Troubleshooting 348 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 e Check the paper type thickness and quality pete e Remove the toner cartridge and then install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 a C AaBbCc If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative AsoCc Aa Kc Character voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications Horizonta
24. with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK 6 On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time screen select Yes I will set up my printer s wireless network Then click Next If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window appears click the window and select Run Setup exe If your printer is already connected on the network select No my printer is already connected to my network Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window Then click Next 7 After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of the access point you want to use and click Next 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wireless network setup L If you cannot find the network name you want to choose or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID of the access point SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select Infrastructure e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based on a WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called P
25. 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wireless network setup 1 Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine If 7 Select the one Network Name SSID in the list not connect the machine with a standard network cable a KA f a SSID SSID Service Set Identifier is a name that identifies a wireless network access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is case sensitive 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example e Operation Mode Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections see Wireless network name and network password on page 190 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website Ad hoc Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer to peer environment http 192 168 1 133 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons Infrastructure Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point ID admin t KA If your network s Operation Mode is Infrastructure select the SSID of the y access point If the Operation Mode is Ad hoc select the machine s SSID 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings 8 Click Ne
26. 288 292 82 68 256 361 175 207 257 144 146 24 26 259 90 93 105 90 97 316 316 T toner cartridge estimated life 93 handling instructions 92 non Samsung and refilled 92 redistributing toner 94 replacing the cartridge 97 storing 92 touch screen keyboard 262 tray adjusting the width and length 47 changing the tray size 47 loading paper in multi purpose tray 50 ordering an optional tray 91 ordering an parallel connector 91 setting the paper size and type 57 U understanding the status LED 134 UNIX driver installation for network connected 184 printing 283 Unix system requirements 150 USB 253 USB cable driver installation 28 30 169 171 driver reinstallation 170 172 USB flash memory data backup 85 managing 85 printing 84 scanning 82 using keyboard 262 using help 65 281 W watermark create 274 delete 274 edit 274 Windows common Windows problems 356 driver installation for network connected 179 Index 383 i Index driver installation for USB cable connected 28 30 system requirements 148 using SetIP 175 207 wireless ad hoc mode 190 Infrastructure mode 190 USB cable 196 WPS disconnectiong 193 WPS the machine does not have a display screen PBC 194 PIN 194 wireless network network cable 206
27. Next gt select the folder or file you want gt WIT Option settings gt Format on the touch screen 3 Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears 4 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 86 Using USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Select Direct USB gt File Manage gt Check Space on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Iv Direct USB gt Show Space gt Next on the touch screen 3 The available memory space appears on the display 4 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 3 Maintenance This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine Ordering supplies and accessories Available consumables Available accessories Storing the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Installing accessories Monitoring the supplies life Setting the toner low alert Cleaning the machine Tips for moving amp storing your machine Ordering supplies and accessories KA Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales repr
28. SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices ina WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images o
29. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examples of common restrictions are listed below A Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication gt gt BB gt In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country If your system came equipped with
30. devices that have mass storage e The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Item Description Sets scan destination to a shared folder You can create Shared Folder and use the shared folder see Using shared folder features on page 308 WA Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Press scan gt Menu gt Scan Setup on the control panel Or Scan to gt Menu gt Scan Setup on the control panel Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Scan Default on the touch screen Forthemodel with a touch screen press rx Scan 5 select the menu item you want on the touch screen 3 Useful Setting Menus 235 Scan Description Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of the paper 2 Sided Rotated e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only e 2Sided For originals that are printed on both sides 2Sided Rotated For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees 2 If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking to place another page Load another original and press Y
31. error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem There is a problem in the LSU Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service 4 Troubleshooting nat J Understanding display messages Message Error error number Input System Failure error number Check tray 2 connection Meaning There is a problem in the tray 2 Suggested solutions Check the tray2 connection Error error number Video System Failure error number Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the video system Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service 4 Troubleshooting 142 5 Appendix This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations e Specifications e Regulatory information e Copyright Specifications General specifications KU The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice See www samsung com for possible changes in information Items Description Dimension Width x Length x Height M337xFD M337xHD M387xFD M387xHD 414 6 x 420 6 x 449 1 mm 16 32 x 16 56 x 17 68 inches M387xFW M407xFR M407xHR M407xFX 469 x 444 3 x 482 1 mm 18 46 x 17 49 x 18 98 inches M407XFD 482 x 410 6 x 449 1 mm 19 02 x 16 17 x 17 68 inches Weight Machine with consumables M337xFD M337xHD M387xFD M387xHD 15 15 kg 33 4 Ib
32. information report s e Your computer access point or wireless router or machine may not be If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP turned on connect to a network printer Then reconnect the IP address e You cannot enable wired and wireless networks at the same time e Check the wireless reception around the machine If the router is far from the machine or there is an obstacle you might have difficulty receiving the Fora Static network environment signal The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured e Cycle the power for the access point or wireless router machine and to static address computer Sometimes cycling the power can recover network For example communication If the computer s network information is as shown below Check whether firewall software V3 or Norton is blocking the P address 169 254 133 42 communication Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot be found when searching firewall software might be blocking the communication Refer to the user s guide for the software to turn it off and IP address 169 254 133 43 try searching for the machine again Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Then the machine s network information should be as below Check whether the machine s IP address is allocated correctly You can Gateway 169 254 133 1 chec
33. it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 e Press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book on the touch screen Item Description Individual You can create a individual Group You can create a group Print You can print the address book Delete All You can delete the current all address book 3 Useful Setting Menus Network setup 3 Item Description 2 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on Selects this option to use the network environment TCP IP IPv6 n Pi page 32 through IPv6 see IPv6 configuration on page 187 Configure the network transmission speed or port 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Ethernet Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings gt Network Settings see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Turn the power off and on after you change this option Select the user authentication for network 802 1x communication For detailed information consult the Press Menu gt Network on the control panel ak network administrator Forthe model with a touch screen press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Wi Fi Selects this option to use the wireless network Next gt Network
34. on Hook Dial and then Start button Ans Fax Is for when an answering machine is attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax To use the Ans Fax mode attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine DRPD You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers For further details see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 304 This setting may not be available depending on your country Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection Press Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode 4 Special Features gg Fax features Receiving manually in Tel mode You can receive a fax call by pressing on Hook Dial button and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone If your machine has a handset you can answer calls using the handset see Features by models on page 8 Receiving in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine If the caller leav
35. on page 75 Forthe model with a touch screen press rx Scan 5 select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item Description USB Feature Sets scan destination to a USB You scan the originals USB and save the scanned image to a USB device Scan to Email Sets scan destination to an email You scan the originals Email and email the scanned image to destinations see Scanning to email on page 287 3 Useful Setting Menus 234 Scan Item File Format Description Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select JPEG TIFF XPS or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear Multi Page PDF Scans originals in PDF but several originals are scanned as one file Single Page PDF Scans the originals in PDF and several originals are scanned as an each individual PDF file Multi Page TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file Single Page TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file Multi Page XPS Scans originals in XPS but several originals are scanned as one file Single Page XPS Scans the originals in XPS and several originals are scanned as an each individual XPS file JPEG Scans original in JPEG format 2 e XPS This feature is only supported for the
36. place it as shown in the following figure Thick i Thicker Thin gt ba id Bond Color E CardStock e ba Labels j Transparency Envelope 7 Preprinted Cotton Recycled e a Archive ki z a This is an optional feature see Various features on page 10 Supported Blank Not supported 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 53 Media and tray e Donot use damaged or poorly made envelopes If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles creases or black bold lines open the rear cover and pull down the pressure lever on the right side about 90 degrees and try printing again Keep the rear cover opened during printing Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable 3 e Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second about 170 C 338 F The extra flaps and strips 1 Pressure lever might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser e For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the e When selecting envelopes consider the following factors edges of the envelope Weight should not exceed 90 g m otherwise jams m r TOER SE g g a A aaa e Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Construction should lie flat wit
37. 10 8 04 8 10 9 04 9 10 10 04 10 10 11 04 32 64 bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 32 64 bit Debian 4 0 5 0 6 0 32 64 bit CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz Intel Core 2 RAM 512 MB 1 GB Free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB 5 Appendix 149 Specifications Unix Items Operating system Requirements Sun Solaris 9 10 11 x86 SPARC HP UX 11 0 11i v1 11i v2 11i v3 PA RISC Itanium IBM AIX 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 1 7 1 PowerPC Free HDD space Up to 100 MB 5 Appendix 150 Specifications Network environment KU Network and wireless models only see Features by models on page 8 You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Items Specifications Network interface Ethernet 10 100 100 Base TX Wired Lan Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Wired Lan 802 11b g n Wireless LAN Network operating system Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS X 10 5 10 8 UNIX OS Network protocols TCP IPv4 DHCP BOOTP DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP WSD AirPrint Google Cloud Print ThinPrint SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS Standard TCP IP Printing LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec Wireless security
38. 228 printing faxes on both sides of the paper 306 receiving a fax in the computer 302 receiving faxes in memory 307 receiving in Answering Machine mode 304 receiving in DRPD mode 304 receiving in Fax mode 304 receiving in secure mode 305 receiving in Tel mode 304 receiving with ext telephone 304 redialing the last number 297 sending a fax in the computer 298 sending faxes on both sides of paper 301 fax feature 297 fax sending multi sending 78 faxing adjusting darkness 80 adjusting resolution 79 preparing to fax 76 receiving in Fax mode 79 features machine features 219 print media feature 146 front view 21 G general icons 14 general settings 238 glossary 367 google cloud printing 217 H help button 26 l id copy 73 J jam clearing jam 116 tips for avoiding paper jams 115 L LCD display browsing the machine status 222 227 228 232 235 Linux common Linux problems 358 driver installation for network connected 183 driver installation for USB cable connected 171 driver reinstallation for USB cable connected printer properties printing scanning system requirements unifled driver configurator using SetIP linux scanning loading paper in multi purpose tray paper in the tray1 special media loading originals 172 282 281 295 149 332 177 295 50 49 52 59 Index M Mac common Mac problems 357 driver installation for network connected 182 driver ins
39. 316 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 320 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 321 Using Samsung Printer Status 324 Using Samsung Printer Experience 326 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 332 6 Troubleshooting Paper feeding problems 337 Power and cable connecting problems 338 Printing problems 339 Printing quality problems 343 1 Software Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the machine is connected via a cable A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine s driver see Installing driver over the network on page 178 Installation for Mac 169 Reinstallation for Mac 170 Installation for Linux 171 Reinstallation for Linux 172 r Ifyou are a Windows OS user refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine s driver see Installing the driver locally on page 28 e Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter 118 inches Installation for Mac 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop For Mac OS X 10 8 double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Double click th
40. 678 lub 48 22 Q2_22 NORWAY 815 56 480 www samsung com O07233 POLAND ca kowity koszt po czenia jak 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ae za 1 impuls wed ug taryfy English OMAN operatora www samsung com koszt po czenia wed ug ae_ar Arabic taryfy operatora PAKISTAN 0800 Samsung 72678 www samsung com PORTUGAL 808 20 SAMSUNG 808 20 7267 www samsung com pk PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com 800 7267 www samsung com latin Spanish PANAMA www samsung com latin_en English Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 364 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 800 2255 800 CALL WebSite www samsung com ae Country Region Customer Care Center 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 CHF WebSite www samsung com ch CATAR Engis SWITZERLAND 0 08 min www samsung com www samsung com ch fr ae ar Arabic SYRIA 18252273 www samsung com RWANDA 9999 www samsung com Levant English 08008 SAMSUNG 08008 726 www samsung com ro TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com 7864 Belt TAIWAN 0800 329 999 www samsung com tw TOLL FREE No TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www samsung com RUSSIA 800 00 0077 www samsung com a 1800 29 3232 www samsung com th 200 212 3 5 THAILAN SAUDI ARABIA 9200 30 Aa samsung com sa 027 689 3732 Arabic 8 800 555 55 55 Wwwwisamsung cor TRINIDAD a
41. Anincorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove any debris Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes 6 Troubleshooting Power and cable connecting problems a el Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power e Connect the machine to the electricity supply first If the machine has a Power Wake Up button on the control or the connection cable between the press it computer and the machine is not e Disconnect the machine s cable and reconnect it connected properly 6 Troubleshooting 338 Printing problems Condition The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Possible cause Suggested solutions Connect the machine to the electricity supply first If the machine has a Power Wake Up button on the control press it The machine is not selected as the default Select your machine as your default machine in Windows machine Check the machine for the following The cover is not closed Close the cover Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam see Clearing jams on page 116 No paper is loaded Load paper see Loading paper in the tray on page 49 The toner cartri
42. C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain Refer to the Plain paper section 86 to 105 g m 23 to 28 Ibs 86 to 105 g m 23 to 28 Ibs 86 to 105 g m 23 to 28 Ibs paper section bond bond bond Thicker paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 optional tray 164 to 220 g m 44 to 58 lbs bond 164 to 220 g m 44 to 58 Ibs bond Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs bond 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs bond 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Ibs bond 5 Appendix 146 Specifications Print media weight Capacity Type Size Dimensions Tray1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Manual feeder Transparency Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 138 to 146 g m2 36 81 to 138 to 146g m 36 81to optional tray 38 91 Ibs bond 38 91 Ibs bond Labels Letter Legal US Folio Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ibs A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 optional tray Ibs bond bond Executive A5 Card stock Letter Legal US Folio Refer to the Plain paper section 121 to 163 g m 32t043 121 to 163 g m 32 to 43 121 to 163 g m 32 to 43 Ibs A4 JIS B5 ISO B5 Ibs bond lbs bond bond Executive A5 Bond paper Refer to the Plain Refer to t
43. CLASS 3B PEHA URRE TILAS A24 Se IB 7H sola SAM o SSEUICH OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM ANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM LASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN K OFFEN STRAHLENAUSSETZUNG VERMEIDEN NSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3 B WENN BDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL USSETZEN SPOSITIVO APERTO EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL ADIACI N L SER INVISIBLE DE CLASE 3B PRESENTE L ABRIR EVITE LA EXPOSICION AL HAZ LASSE 3B RADIA O LASER INVIS VEL AO ABRIR VITE EXPOSIGAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE LASSE 3B ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALING INDIEN EOPEND VERMIJD BLOOTSTELLING AAN DE STRAAL LASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED ABNING NDGA UDSATTELSE FOR STR LING Al Al CLASSE 3B RADIZIONI LASER INVISBILI CON IL Al c PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN LASS 3B OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL R OPPNAD STRALEN AR FARLIG UOKAN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASER SATEILYA Bdo SS Woe ode ventilation This product s ozone emission rate is under 0 1 ppm Because ozone is heavier than air keep the product in a place with good 5 Appendix 152 Regulatory information Mercury Safety Recycling urbe Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer d
44. Cloud ed secure Release see Scan to cloud on page 255 see Secure release on page 256 Google Drive Stored Job Dropbox BES Option settings Evernote Card ID PW PIN a You can change the default login window from the SyncThru Web Service 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup aa Machine s basic settings You can set the machine s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt A Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Device Settings on page 323 After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings To change the machine s default settings follow these steps It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Select Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select O Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup on the touch screen Select the option you want then press OK For the model with a touch screen select the option you want go to step 4 e Language change the language that is displayed on the control panel e Date amp Time When you set the time and date they are used in delay fax and delay print They are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for the correct time being Enter the cor
45. Copy Default on the touch screen Copies Enter the number of copies using the number keypad Check the current tray settings and change the settings For the model with a touch screen press Copy gt select the menu item if necessary you want on the touch screen Tray Item Description Auto Automatically locates the tray with the same sized paper as an original Original Size Sets the image size Improves the copy quality by selecting the document Original Type type for the current copy job see Original Type on page 71 Sets the direction in which information is copied ona Original Orientation page 3 Useful Setting Menus 222 Copy Item Description Item Description Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of paper Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is Darkness easier to read when the original contains faint e 1 gt 1 Sided Scans one side of an original and prints markings and dark images see Darkness on page 71 it on one side of the paper 1 gt 2 Sided e Collation Sets the machine to sort the copy job For example if Collation Copy you make 2 copies ora page original one complete 3 A B gt A page document will print followed by a second complete document 1 gt 2 Sided Rotated e On Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals NG sA ne
46. Coverage Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area wher
47. Fax memory is almost full Print or remove received fax job The memory is full No more fax data can be received Print or remove the received fax data in the memory Message Error error number Fuser Unit Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem Meaning There is a problem in the fuser unit Suggested solutions Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service e Scanner Locked Scanner is locked Press Stop button The scanner is locked Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service Error error number HDD System Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem There is a problem in the HDD system Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service Scanner door open Door of scanner is open Close the door The document feeder cover is not securely latched Close the cover until it locks into place Memory Full Fax memory is almost full Print or remove received fax job The fax memory is almost full Print or remove the received fax job in Secure Receive Error error number Motor Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem There is a problem in the Motor system Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service Error error number LSU Failure
48. For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt J Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see 2 If you set the Eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru Web Device Settings on page 323 Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco the On force message appears You have to enter the password to change the Eco mode status 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 66 Basic printing Change Template Follow the settings from Syncthru Web Service or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Before you select this item you must set the eco function in SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco Select Template Default Settings The machine is set to Default Settings mode Custom Settings Change any necessary values 3 Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection Press X Stop or Stop Clear button or home EJ icon to return to ready mode Setting Eco mode on the driver To take advantage of the advanced printing features click Properties or Preferences from the Print window see Opening printing preferences on page 64 Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode When you see the eco image 4 that means the Eco mode is currently enable
49. List 5 enter the destination fax number using number keypad on the touch screen Press Start on the control panel For the model with a touch screen press Send on the touch screen The machine starts to scan and send the fax to the destinations If you want to send a fax directly from your computer use Samsung Network PC Fax see Sending a fax in the computer on page 298 When you want to cancel a fax job press stop or Stop Clear button before the machine starts transmission If you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page Sending a fax manually Perform the following to send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Select amp fax on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Fax On Hook Dial on the touch screen Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs see Adjusting the document settings on page 79 For the model with a touch screen press Option settings 5 select the option you want using arrows Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset For the model with a touch screen press On Hook on the touch screen Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel or touch screen see Understanding keypad on page 2
50. Secured Job on the control 1 i panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Document Box 5 System Boxes gt Next gt Secured Print on the touch screen 2 Select the document to print 3 Enter the password that you set from the printer driver 4 Print or delete the document 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 6o Basic copying 5 Press Start KA e For special printing features refer to the Advanced Guide see Copy on page 222 e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview 9 If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation press stop on page 32 or Control panel overview on page 23 or Stop Clear button and the copying will stop a q Select lt copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and Or select Menu 5 Copy Feature on the control panel j 3 ni a vee easily make a copy OR For the model with a touch screen select Copy Basle Copy K e Ifyou press the x Stop or Stop Clear button twice while setting the copy options all of the options you have set for the current copy job will 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the be canceled and returned to their default status Or they will documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on automatically return to their default status after the machin
51. Setup on the touch screen Reverts the network settings to the default values Item Description Clear Settings Turn the power off and on after you change this Selects the appropriate protocol and configure option parameters to use the network environment see Setting IP address on page 175 Network Displays information on your machine s network TCP IP IPv4 Configuration connection and configuration There are lots of parameters to be set If you are not sure leave as is or consult the network administrator 3 Useful Setting Menus 248 Network setup Item Description Item Description You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off e HTTP You can set whether to use SyncThru Web Service or not WINS You can configure the WINS server WINS eee K Turn the power off and on after you change this Windows Internet Name Service is used in the option Windows operating system e SNMPv1 v2 You can set SNMP Simple Network Ethernet Speed You can set the ethernet speed Management Protocol Administrator s can use SNMP to monitor and manage machines on the network SNTP You can set SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol settings SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer systems through the Internet NTP so there would not be a time difference when exchanging data e UPnP SSDP You can set UPnP protocol mDNS You can set mDNS Multicast Domain Name System settings Pro
52. Stop Clear button or home A icon to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine 4 Special Features 1300 Fax features 2 Enter the destination fax number email address or server address and Forwarding a received fax press OK For the model with a touch screen turn this option On and then enter You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination the forward number by a fax an email or a server If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful 3 Enter the starting tim and ending time then press OK 4 Press Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready 2 Though you sent or received a color fax the data is forwarded in grayscale mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine q Press fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Receive Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to PC Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel Sending faxes on both sides of paper OR For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup Thisis available only when you load originals into the document feeder gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Receive Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or PC Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen models If so it is not applicable to your
53. T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web Glossary Glossary LDAP MH The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory se
54. The indicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel If you select Stop the printer stops printing If you select Continue the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Samsung does not recommend using a non genuine Samsung cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee a non genuine Samsung cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty Message Output bin full Output bin full Remove printed paper Tray related messages Meaning The output tray is full Suggested solutions Remove papers from the output tray the printer resumes printing The indicated toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated cartridge which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by the percentage of image area operating environment printing i
55. Uninstall 5 Follow the instructions in the window w Follow the instructions in the window If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile unintstall from the 3 Follow the instructions in the installation window 2 desktop screen mode e Ifyou want to uninstall Samsung s printer management tools from the Start screen right click the app gt Uninstall gt right click the program you want to delete gt Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window 1 Introduction EJ 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options Menu overview 32 Machine s basic settings 45 Media and tray 47 Basic printing 62 Basic copying 70 Basic scanning 75 Basic faxing 76 Using USB memory device 81 Menu overview The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions M337xFD M337xHD M387xFD M387xFW M387xHD M407xFD M407xFR M407xHR KA An checked V appears next to the currently selected menu Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models e The menus are described in the Advanced Guide see Useful Setting Menus on page 219 Accessing the menu Select the Fax Copy or Scan button on the control panel depending on the
56. When you have finished select No when Another No appears and For the model with a touch screen press Group Members gt add or press OK delete the group number using the Phone Book Go to step 7 8 Press Stop Clear button or home A icon to return to ready Press OK to add or delete the number mode Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers Select No at the Another No and press OK Editing group dial numbers q Select pi fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Group Dial on mode the control panel OR Press Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready N OQ wl Kk Searching address book for an entry For the model with a touch screen select o Setup 5 Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View Lists gt Group on There are two ways to search for a number in memory You can either scan from the touch screen A to Z sequentially or you can search by entering the first letters of the name i ith th 2 Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK associated withe number For the model with a touch screen press Name gt edit the group name using the keyboad 4 Special Features 265 Setting up the address book 1 Select ct ps fax gt Address Book gt Search amp Dial gt Speed Dial or Group Dial on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select o Setup 5 Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phon
57. appear in the display depending on options or models if so it is not applicable to your machine e Tray Options Select the optional tray you installed You can select the tray Storage Options Select the optional memory you installed If this feature is checked you can select the Print Mode Printer Configuration Select the printer language for the print job e Administrator Settings You can select the Printer Status and EMF Spooling 7 Admin Job Accounting Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job If you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption Custom Paper Size Settings You can specify custom paper size Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window 3 Maintenance 102 Installing accessories Upgrading a memory module Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM Use this memory module slot to install additional memory We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM s You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM s The order information is provided for optional accessories see Available accessorie
58. but Plain Paper actually used an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem e Ifyou are using a new toner cartridge redistribute the toner first see Redistributing toner on page 94 Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set the paper type to Recycled see Opening printing preferences on page 64 e Ensure the correct paper type is selected For example If Thicker Paper is selected but Plain Paper actually used an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem 6 Troubleshooting 346 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Misformed characters e If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCcac AaBbCac Page skew e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality RA e Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack feb W O O Curl or wave e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl AagbCC Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray 6 Troubleshooting
59. clearing a jam 4 Troubleshooting 120 Clearing jams Inside the machine A The Fuser area is HOT please wait until device cools down before accessing this area Turn power off to cool the machine down Take care when removing paper from the machine K Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 Troubleshooting 121 Clearing jams M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series x atl fe lick this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 4 Troubleshooting 122 Clearing jams M3375 M3875 M4075 series x atl fe lick this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 4 Troubleshooting 123 Clearing jams In the exit area Ss gs Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The Fuser area is HOT please wait until device cools down before accessing this area Turn power off to cool the machine down Take care when removing paper from the machine 4 Troubleshooting 124 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting 125 Clearing jams In the duplex unit area ng Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 4 Troubleshooting 126 Clearing jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting
60. confirm printing an overlay on your document Overlay If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window m In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list Overlay Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box Click Delete When a confirming message window appears click Yes Deleting a page overlay ODO Oo NN TF OD Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description 2 This feature is available only if you have installed the mass storage device or optional memory see Various features on page 10 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e This feature is not enabled Storage Options check see Setting Device Options on page 101 e Without installing the mass storage device in the machine the RAM Disk feature provides only 3 options Normal Proof and Confidential Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory Normal This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory Proof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can prin
61. disk will be Registering authorized users on page 268 overwritten as many times as the number you select e German VSITR Select to overwrite the memory 7 times i Seith f hendmnset When overwriting for the 6 times alternate 0x00 and Oxff amp Sis NG ete mip care LO ARAR EA N SEUR SN are used to overwrite the disk and in the 7th time the You can set secure release settings Secure release feature Image Overwrite disk is written with OxAA allows you to hold the job on the machine and print after e DoD5220 28 M Select to overwrite the memory 3 times authentication When overwriting three times patterns 0x35 OxCA 0x97 r ed to overwrite the disk s content This method of Max Job Count per User You can set the number of aiai pa Kai kea Kag overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD print jobs allowed for each user E Australian ACS133 Select to overwrite the memory 5 e Smart Release You can print all the stored print jobs you Pag a me aoe y Bein AA times When overwriting 5 times character C and its Secure Release gg l complement alternatively are used to overwrite the disk Release Mode You can choose the release mode If you After the 2nd time there is a mandatory validation For choose Secure Mode normal and confidential jobs are the 5th time random data is used printed after authentication However store jobs are printed without an authentication Other jobs gets cancelled If you choose Mixed Mode confidential
62. display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Fax Confirmation Image TCR Auto Reduction Discard Size Receive Start Code DRPD Mode Paper Source Duplex Print Fax Setup Wizard 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Menu overview Network Setup TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 Ethernet 802 1x Protocol Management HTTP WINS SNMPv1 v2 SNTP UPnP SSDP mDNS SetIP SLP Network Configuration Clear Settings Print Setup Orientation Duplex Copies setup see System setup on page 238 Resolution Clear Text Edge Enhance Auto CR Skip Blank Pages Emulation Paper Source Initial Setup Machine ID amp Fax Number Date amp Time Clock Mode Select Country Language Default Mode Sound Volume Power Save Wakeup Event System Timeout Job Timeout Held Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Toner Status Alert Imaging Unit Low Alert Firmware Version PDF Type Import Setting Export Setting Default Paper Size CLR Empty Msg Image Management Adim Setup User Access Control Authentication Card Registration Stamp Stamp Activate Item Opacity Position Secure Release Max Job Count per User Smart Release Release Mode Change Admin Password Firmware Upgrade Image Overwrite Application Application Management Install New Application Troubleshooting Paper jam in MP Tray Paper jam in Tray 1 Paper jam in Tray 2 Jam inside machine Jam in exit area Jam inside of
63. dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 3 Maintenance Replacing the toner cartridge Toner cartridge M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series x we Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge 3 Maintenance o8 Replacing the toner cartridge M3375 M3875 M4075 series x we Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge 3 Maintenance ao Replacing the imaging unit M3375 M3875 M4075 series x aoe H Click this link to open an animation about replacing a imaging unit 3 Maintenance 100 j Installing accessories Disconnect the power cord When you install the optional devices such as optional tray memory etc this Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver you can set the optional devices To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power p in Device Options cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Dish icel HG PENJE ANE PIRENEI 1 Click the Windows Start menu The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your
64. duplex Original paper jam Language a This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge b You need to enter a password to enter this menu The default password is sec00000 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Menu overview Job Status see Job Status on page 251 Current Job Complete Job YG Eco see Eco on page 252 Eco On Eco Off Settings Default Mode On Off On Forced Feature Configuration Default Custom Copy Settings PC Dirver Print Settings USB see USB on page 253 Print From WIN Option settings Copies Auto Fit Duplex Paper Source Scan to USB WENN Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF File Policy Duplex Darkness File Name File Manage WEN Option settings Format Delete Show Space a Document Box see Document box on page 254 System Boxes Stored Print Secured Print Shared Folder WEN Option settings Copies Auto Fit Duplex Paper Source a If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco the On force message appears You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup las Menu overview I scan to
65. feature to be used Select Menu until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK 1 4 If the setting item has sub menus repeat step 3 5 Press OK to save the selection Press Stop or Stop Clear button to return to the ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup ee Menu overview Copy Feature Copy Setup Fax Feature see Copy feature on page 222 see Copy Setup on page 227 see Fax Feature on page 228 Original Size Collation Stamp Change Default Original Type Darkness Multi Send Reduce Enlarge Layout Item Original Size Text Light 5 Light 1 Delay Send Duplex Normal Opacity Copies Text Photo Normal Send Forward 1 gt 1 Sided 2 Up Position Reduce Enlarge Photo Dark 1 Dark 5 Forward to Fax 1 gt 2 Sided 4 Up Watermark Duplex Collation Resolution Forward to Email 1 gt 2 Sided Rotated ID Copy Message 1 gt 1 Sided Standard Forward to Server 2 gt 1 Sided Book Copy e 1 gt 2 Sided Fine Receive Forward Pages 2 gt 1 Sided Rotated Adjust Background P 1 gt 2 Sided Super Fine Forward to Fax 2 gt 2 Sided off Text aize Rotated Color Mode Forward to PC Darkness Auto Position 2 51 Sided Mono Forward to Email Light 5 Light 1 Enhance Lev 1 Darkness 2 51 Sided Color Forward to Server Rotated ns Normal Enhance Lev 2 Original Type Forward amp Print 2 gt 2 Sided Dark 1 Dark 5 Erase Lev 1 Ba Text Secure Receive Orig
66. for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard Glossary Glossary IPM ITU T The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A
67. gt Machine Setup gt Next 5 Paper Setup on the touch screen Item Description Sets the paper size as A4 Letter or other paper sizes Paper Size according to your requirements 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup Item MP Tray Description Sets the paper margins in multi purpose tray Simplex Margin Sets the margin for one sided printing e Duplex Margin Sets the margins for double sided printing e Top Margin Sets the top margin e Left Margin Sets the left margin Manual Feeder Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray Tray Confirmation Activates the tray confirmation message If you open and close a tray a window asking you whether to set the paper size and type for the tray just opened appears lt Tray X gt Sets the paper margins for the paper trays Simplex Margin Sets the margin for one sided printing e Duplex Margin Sets the margins for double sided printing e Top Margin Sets the top margin e Left Margin Sets the left margin Sound Volume K Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Sound Volume on the control panel e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup Next 5 Initial Setup 5 Sound Volume on the touch screen Item
68. hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps 802 11b g n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Mac 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform Glossary Glossary BOOTP
69. jobs are printed after authentication but other jobs are printed without an authentication 3 Useful Setting Menus 242 System setup Item Description Item Description You can install or uninstall applications Paper Type Chooses the type of the paper for each tray Application Management You can uninstall or enable Paper Source Selects from which tray the paper is used Application disable installed applications Margin Sets the margins for the document Install New Application You can install a new application from a USB Simplex Margin Sets the margin for one sided printing e Duplex Margin Sets the margin for double sided Paper setup printing Binding When printing on both sides of the paper Common Margin side A s margin closest to the binding will be the same as side B s margin closest to the binding Likewise the Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or sides margins farthest from the binding will be the models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on same page 32 Top Margin Sets the top margin e Left Margin Sets the left margin To change the menu options Sets the paper margins for emulation print page e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Paper Setup on the control panel Emulation Margin Top Margin Sets the top margin e Left Margin Sets the left margin e For the model with a touch screen press o Setup
70. machine e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 e To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print 4 Special Features 301 i Fax features 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder Receiving a fax in the computer 2 Press pi fax 5 Fax Feature 5 Duplex on the control panel OR This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods Hy see Features by models on page 8 For the model with a touch screen select di Fax gt select the menu e To use this feature set the option on the control panel or touch screen you want gt select Duplex from the sub menus gt on the touch screen Ge Press lt gt fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Receive Forward gt e 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one isde only Forward to PC gt Forward the control panel e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides Press Q Setup 5 Machine Setup 5 Next 5 Fax Setup 5 Receive 2 51Sided Rotated For originals that are printed on both sides Forward gt Forward to PC gt Forward on the touch screen but the back is rotated 180 Open the Samsung Easy Printer Ma
71. machine waits until you insert the correct paper Job Timeout Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing the last page of a print job that does not end with a command to print the page Held Job Timeout Sets the time to hold the temprarily stopped job Altitude Optimize print quality according to the machine s Adjustment altitude Allows you to append the required carriage return to Auto CR ores 1 a each line feed which is useful for Unix or DOS users Wakeup Event When this option is On you can wake up the machine from the power saving mode with the following actions loading paperin a tray e opening or closing the front cover pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in connecting a USB memory device only for the models that support USB memory devices Firmware Version Shows the product s firmware version Paper Stacking If you use a machine in a humid area or you are using the damp print media caused by a high humidity the print outs on the output tray may be curled and may not be stacked properly In this case you can set the machine to use this function to let print outs stacked firmly But using this function will make the print speed slow 3 Useful Setting Menus 239 System setup Item Auto Tray Switch Description Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match For example if both tray 1
72. more people A Warning The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place the machine Also consider the space required to open the cover and trays Do not place the machine in an area with dust humidity or water leaks The place should be well ventilated and be far from direct light This could result in electric shock or fire heat and humidity Xo Place the machine in the environment where it meets the Os When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a operating temperature and humidity specification FA large number of pages in a non ventilated space it could pollute the air and be harmful to your health Place the machine in a well Otherwise quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically 1 Introduction See General specifications on page 144 Safety information Do not place the machine on an unstable surface The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord if necessary Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire Maintenance Checking A Caution O O OO Use the power cord supplied with your machin
73. multitasking area You can click cancel in the print center 2 Using a Network Connected Machine gg Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your smart phone tablet or any other web connected devices Just register your Google account with the printer and you are ready to use the Google Cloud Print service You can print your document or email with Chrome OS Chrome browser or a Gmail Google Docs application on your mobile device so you don t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device Refer to the Google website http www google com cloudprint learn or http support google com cloudprint for more information about Google Cloud Print Registering your Google account to the printer 2 e Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet You should create your Google account in the advance Open the Chrome browser Visit www google com Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address A W N Enter your printer s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service website If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator Type in the below default ID and Password We recommend you to change the default
74. network KA See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details 2 On some UNIX OS for example on Solaris 10 just added printers may not be enabled and or may not accept jobs In this case run the following two commands on the root terminal 4 Unpack the UNIX printer driver package saed Sprinter names For example on IBM AIX use the following commands i E enable lt printer_name gt gzip d lt enter the package name tar xf 5 the unpacked directory Uninstalling the printer driver package 6 Run the install script install i KA The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard Use chmod 755 install command to give the permission to the The installed printers are listed in the drop down list install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package installer script b Select the printer to be deleted c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system 7 Execute the install c command to verify installation results d Execute the install d command to uninstall the whole package e To verify removal results execute the install c command 8 Run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window referring to the foll
75. network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document 5 Appendix 160 Regulatory information European radio approval information for products fitted with EU approved radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedded in your printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices CE The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark is on the system label European states qualified under wireless approvals EU countries European states with restrictions on use EU EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time Israel only 51 30319 NIN DWWPNA TIWN IV IVININ VWN DN PWINA IW 19419190 AIVINA NN PINNI NON ANN 2990 NDW 72 13 MUH NI Regulatory compliance statements Wireless guidance Low power Radio LAN devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the
76. not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 Selects the color mode in which you want to send the lor Mod To change the menu options Colepmpde fax Press d fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature on the control panel Original Type Ennances tHe ra ali bisedon hepe Oya original document being scanned Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax Default P P P g Original Size Sets the image size on the touch screen This function is especially intended for two sided e Forthe model with a touch screen press Aa Fax 5 select titem you want originals You can select whether the machine sends on the touch screen the fax on one side or both sides of the paper e 1Sided For originals that are printed on one side e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt only A p Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen l j e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides a Dupl e 2 Sided Rotated For originals that are printed on Item Description upiex both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is Darkness easier to read when the original contains faint WA To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotated load the originals on the DADF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided 3 Useful Setting Menus 228 markings and dark images see Darknes
77. painful cuts When printing large quantities the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot Do not allow children to touch Burns can occur When removing jammed paper do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects It can damage the machine Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray It can damage the machine 1 Introduction 16 Safety information O Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening A Caution This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire Before moving the machine turn the power off and disconnect all Os es S Use of controls oradjuatmens or petmolmanice oriprecedures other cords The information below are only suggestions based on the than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation units weight exposure If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting do This machine s power reception device is the power cord not lift the machine Ask for help and always use the appropriate amount of people to lift the device safety To switch off the power supply remove the power cord from the electrical outlet Then lift the machine e Ifthe machine weighs under 20 kg 44 09 Ibs lift with 1 person Ifthe machine weighs 20 kg 44 09 Ibs 40kg 88 18 Ibs lift Installation Moving with 2 people If the machine weighs more than 40 kg 88 18 Ibs lift with 4 or
78. password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 If the network environment is using a proxy server you need to configure the proxy s IP and port number from Settings gt Network Settings gt Google Cloud Print gt Proxy Setting Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings gt Google Cloud Print Enter your printer s name and description Click Register The confirmation pop up window appears If you set the browser to block pop ups the confirmation window will not appear Allow the site to show pop ups 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Google Cloud Print 10 Click Finish printer registration Access the Google Docs application from your mobile device 11 Click Manage your printers Tap the option button of the document that you want to print Tap the send b button Tap the Cloud Print S button Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service Google Cloud Print ready devices will appear in the list Set the printing options if you want Na uBR WN Tap Click here to Print Printing with Google Cloud Print Printing from the Chrome browser The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print service The following steps are an
79. printer status operating system problems 356 Samsung Easy Document Creator 293 general information 324 problems samsung printer experience 326 printing copying problems 351 Samsung Printer Status 324 changing the default print settings 269 faxing problems 354 scan Linux 281 paper feeding problems 337 general setup 234 Mac 280 power problems 338 scan feature 285 multiple pages on one sheet of paper printing problems 339 scan to cloud 255 Mac 280 printing quality problems 343 Scanning printing a document scanning problems 352 Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Windows 62 R Creator 293 printing on both sides of paper scanning Mac 281 rear view 22 basic information 285 printing to a file 270 regulatiory information 152 Linux scanning 295 setting as a default machine 269 reports Mac 294 special printer features 271 machine information 222 223 228 230 Scanning from image editing program 292 UNIX 283 231 236 239 245 246 Scanning from network connected machine USB memory 84 reset button 26 286 290 291 Index 382 Index Scanning to email Scanning to FTP SMB server Scanning using the WIA driver USB flash memory secu printing secure release service contact numbers SetIP program Special features specifications print media status Storing supplies available supplies estimated toner cartridge life monitoring the supplies life ordering replacing toner cartridge SyncThru Web Service general information SyncThru Web Service 287
80. properly only in Windows Vista or higher From the control panel Activating IPv6 2 Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8 or Menu overview LI on page 32 Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview ey on page 32 The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for managements some models Link local Address Self configured local IPv6 address Address starts with FE80 1 Select CB menu gt Network gt TCP IP IPv6 gt IPv6 Protocol on the control panel Stateless Address Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network p router OR Stateful Address IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server For the model with a touch screen select Setup gt Machine Setup Manual Address Manually configured IPv6 address by a user gt Next gt Network Setup gt TCP IP IPv6 gt IPv6 Protocol on the touch screen In the IPv6 network environment follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address 2 Select On and press OK For the model with a touch screen select On using arrows on the touch screen 3 Turn the machine off and turn it on again 2 Using a Network Connected Machine IPv6 configuration When you install the printer driver do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6 We recommend to configure either IPv4
81. repetitive defects AaBbCc PP AaBbCc AaBbCc PR AaBbCc AaBbCc It Suggested solutions If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals The toner cartridge may be damaged If you still have the same problem remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 e Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages e The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture e If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window see Opening printing preferences on page 64 e Ifbackground scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 64 Ensure the correct paper type is selected For example If Thicker Paper is selected
82. report with a minimized image of i ime i i ialli Image TCR Redial Term Sets the time interval before automatic redialling g ihe frstuaae orthene sent Sets a prefix of up to five digits This number dials Prefix Dial before any automatic dial number is started It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse This Dial Mode setting may not be available depending on your country Sends faxes using error correction mode ECM to Sends faxes at a preset toll saving time to save on call ECM Mode makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any Toll Save costs This setting may not be available depending on error It may take more time your country Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options Fax Setup Wizard y g y P such as machine ID fax number etc 3 Useful Setting Menus 230 Fax Receiving setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options e Press ps fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving on the control panel e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax Default on the touch screen e Forthe model with a touch screen press g Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen Item Description Sele
83. single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle Duty Cycle The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day Glossary 369 Glossary ECM EtherTalk Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networkin
84. the basic fax functionality of the selected device Disable If Disable is On incoming faxes will not be received on this device Enable Fax Receiving from Device Enables faxing on the device and allows more options to be set Alert Settings Windows only This menu includes settings related to error alerting Printer Alert Provides settings related to when alerts will be received Email Alert Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email Alert History Provides a history of device and toner related alerts Job Accounting Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting software such as SyncThru or CounThru admin software 5 Useful Management Tools 323 Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status Icon Mean Description m Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no The Samsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user s errors OK Warnings y guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use a Warning The machine is in a state where an error might occur in e Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine the future For example it might be in toner low status see Specifications on page 144 which may lead to toner empty status
85. the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you ws Enters a blank between characters Also you can insert a pause are doing p Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys You can enter alphabet characters numbers diacritical marks or special symbols using the keyboard on the home screen This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability to the user F Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the numbers or special symbols keyboard ey Switches diacritical characters Touch the input area where you need to enter alphabet characters numbers g diacritical marks or special symbols and the keyboard pops up on the screen A 5 ala wde de de dy de dido gt GI ads la dr Joda did di E Ae fe bo do ln E E Returrns to the upper menu Ack Deletes all characters in the input area 4 Special Features 262 Setting up the address book You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via 4 Enter the fax number you want and press OK SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book 5 Press Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode Registering a speed dial number Using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want 1
86. the tray to adjust to the size see Tray overview on page 47 KU Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 Tray 1 optional tray 1 Pull out the paper tray Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray After inserting paper into the tray squeeze the paper width guides and paper length guide e Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp e Ifyou do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams O X i Im X e Do not use a paper with a leading edge curl it may cause a paper jam or the paper can be wrinkled O x x gt HP 5 Insert the tray back into the machine When you print a document set the paper type and size for tray see Setting the paper size and type on page 57 Multi purpose or manual feeder tray K Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 The multi purpose or manual feeder tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes see Print media specifications on page 146 2 Menu Over
87. touch screen Before starting a fax change the following settings according to your original s status to get the best quality 2 Select the option you want and press OK For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows Press back to go back to the previous screen Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 or Control panel overview on page 23 Standard Originals with normal sized characters It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals printed using a dot matrix printer 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic faxing Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution 2 e For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine e When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine resolution the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine 3 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Al icon to return to ready mode Darkness You can select the degree of darkness of the original document The darkness setting is applie
88. window appears Click Next KA Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer s network 1 0 When the wireless network settings are completed disconnect the USB configuration is set to DHCP the wireless network setting should also be cable between the computer and machine Click Next DHCP Likewise if the computer s network configuration is set to Static the wireless network setting should also be Static 11 Follow the instructions in the installation window If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network setting you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address Setup using Mac e For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows Static click items to prepare Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically DHCP e For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows DHCP click Software CD that was provided with your machine Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine e A machine installed with a wireless network interface e Access point e Network connected computer For example lt USB cable If the comput
89. with improper room temperature Move the machine toa room with proper room temperature see Specifications on page 144 Message Meaning Suggested solutions e IP Conflict The network IP address Check the IP address This IP address conflicts youhave setisbeing used and reset it if with that of other by someone else necessary see system Printing a network configuration report on page 175 e 802 1x Network Error Fail to authenticate Check the network 802 1x Network Error authentication Contact the Admin protocol If the problem persists contact your network administrator Replace retard roller Replace with new tray 1 retard roller Replace retard roller Replace with new tray 2 retard roller The life of the tray reverse roller has expired Replace the tray reverse roller with a new one Contact the service representatives Replace pickup roller Replace with new tray 2 pickup roller The life of the tray pickup roller will be expired Replace the tray pickup roller with a new one Contact the service representatives 4 Troubleshooting 140 Understanding display messages Message Replace pickup roller Replace with new tray type pickup roller Meaning The life of the tray1 tray2 or MP tray pick up roller will expired soon Suggested solutions Replace the tray pick up roller with a new one Contact the service representatives Memory Full
90. your computer or network USB Connected Printer g Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable Network Conneted Printer Wired or Wireless wa Connect the printer to the same network as this computer If you want to change IP address of your device click Set IP Address Button lt gt Configuration of Wireless network This is for users who have not set up the wireless connection before The installer will help you set up the wireless network Select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer Continue 11 After searching the wireless networks a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears Click Advanced Setting KA Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID name SSID is case sensitive Operation Mode Select ad hoc Channel Select the channel Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz 12 e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Password Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index
91. 00 m a 3 280 ft 5 O 1 High4 2 High 3 3 High2 4 High1 5 Normal You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt JA Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Device Settings on page 323 Ifyour machine is connected to the network you can set the altitude via ey SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 e You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine s display see Machine s basic settings on page 45 4 Special Features 258 Storing email address This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book Storing on your machine To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up email address using SyncThru Web Service 1 WJ Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Click Address Book gt Individual gt Add Select the Speed No and enter e mail address and fax number If you need to set SMB or FTP sever information check SMB or FTP and set the information Click App
92. 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Using USB memory device 3 Select scan gt Scan To USB gt OK on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select rx Scan gt USB gt Next gt Start on the touch screen The machine begins scanning After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB job 1 Select scan gt CB Menu gt Scan Feature gt USB Feature on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select i Direct USB gt Scan to USB gt WEN Option settings on the touch screen Select the setting option you want appears For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows 2 Some features may not be available depending on model Original Size Sets the image size Original Type Sets the original document s Resolution Sets the image resolution Color Mode Sets the color mode If you select Mono in this option you cannot select JPEG in File Format File Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved When you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages If you select JPEG in this option you cannot select Mono in Color Mode Duplex Sets the duplex mode Darkness Sets the brightness level to scan an original 3 Select the desired status you want and press OK
93. 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additional limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed 5 Appendix 161 Regulatory information The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting
94. 61 Understanding pop up keyboard on page 262 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic faxing 6 Press Start on the control panel when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the multiple send feature which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station After transmission the originals are automatically erased from memory K You cannot send faxes with this feature if you have chosen super fine as an option 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 2 Select 48 fax gt C Menu gt Fax Feature gt Multi Send on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select 3 Fax gt Speed Dial Send or Group Dial Send on the touch screen Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs see Adjusting the document settings on page 79 For the model with a touch screen press WI Option settings gt back 5 select the option you want using arrows 5 Next on the touch screen Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using the Address book button For the model with a touch screen select the option you want speed dial numbers or selec
95. 7 From the computer Windows user see Access point via USB cable recommended on page 196 Mac user see Access point via USB cable recommended on page 202 See Using a network cable on page 206 From the machine s control panel See Machines with a display screen on page 193 With Access Point e See Machines without a display screen on page 194 See Using the menu button on page 195 Without Access Point From the computer Windows user see Ad hoc via USB cable on page 199 Mac user see Ad hoc via USB cable on page 204 Wi Fi Direct setup See Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing on page 209 r If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation refer to the troubleshooting chapter see Troubleshooting for wireless network on page 211 It is strongly recommended that you set the password on Access Points If you do not set the password on Access Points they might be exposed to illegal access from unknown machines including PCs smart phones and printers Refer to the Access Point user guide for password settings 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 191 Wireless network setup Using the WPS button If your machine and an access point or wireless router support Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can easily configure the wireless network settings by Choosing your type There are two methods available
96. Book Conversion Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one e book or convert existing files into an e book format Plug in Scan fax and convert to E Book directly from the Microsoft Office program 2 Click the Help WPD button from the window and then click on any option you want to know about 5 Useful Management Tools 320 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Open the Applications folder gt Samsung folder gt Samsung Easy Printer KA e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods Manager see Software on page 8 The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic e Available for Windows and Mac OS users only see Software on page 8 sections as described in the table that follows e For Windows Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager K The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are F ere gt using Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung g machine settings into one location Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments settings actions and a Samsung Easy Printer Manager launching All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your es Easy Printer Manager Samsung machine Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user 1 interfaces for the user to choose from the basic user in
97. CP when computer is configured to DHCP If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode the problem may be caused by the automatically changed IP address Compare the IP address between the product s IP address and the printer port s IP address How to compare 1 Print the network information report of your printer and then check the IP address see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 2 Check the printer port s IP address from your computer a Click the Windows Start menu e For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings b For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes e For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers e For Windows 7 Windows 8 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers c Right click your machine d For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 Windows 8 or Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer e Click Port tab f Click Configure Port button 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 212 Wireless network setup g Checkif Printer Name or IP Address is the IP address on the network configuration Sheet 3 Change the printer port s IP address if it is different from the network
98. Config Ethernet Ethernet Port Ethernet Speed 802 1x Wi Fi Wi Fi On Off Wi Fi Settings WPS Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Signal Clear Wi Fi Settings Protocol Management HTTP WINS SNMPv1 v2 SNTP UPnP SSDP mDNS SetIP SLP Network Configuration Clear Settings Job Management see Job management on page 250 Active Job Secured Job Stored Job Shared Folder a Wired and Wireless model only see Features by models on page 8 b This option is available when the optional mass storage device optional memory or RAM Disk is installed c Wireless model only see Features by models on page 8 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 136 Menu overview Scan H When you press Scan from the display screen the Scan M407xFX screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options see Scan on page 234 Fax When you press Fax from the display screen the Fax You can set menus easily using the touch screen pr screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options see Fax on page 228 Setup G You can browse current machine settings or change 2 e The home screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel l machine values See yem Sp Le 238 Job Status 4 You can see the jobs currently running completed job or in e Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models a queue see Job Status on page 251 e Some menu names may differ from your machin
99. EEE 1284B 9 bc Rear cover handle parallel connector 5 Power switch 10 Rear cover a M407xFX only b This is an optional feature see Various features on page 10 c To use the optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector plug it to the UBS port and the 5V output port 1 Introduction 22 Control panel overview i This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model There are various types of control panels e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8 e Some buttons may not work depending on the mode copy fax or scan M337xFD M337xHD M387xFD M387xFW M387xHD M407xFD M407xFR M407xHR N oO A ol y N lt gt A D a Ka CUT 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 1 ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver s license on a single side of paper see ID card copying on page 73 2 Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading when the original contains faint markings and dark images wes Configures the wireless network connection easily without a computer see Wireless network setup on page 190 3 Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation 4 Copy Switches to Copy mode 1 Introduction 23 Control panel overview
100. File Format Duplex Darkness FTP Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness SMB Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Shared Folder Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Scan Setup see Scan setup on page 235 Change Default USB Default Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Email Default Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Email Confirmation Darkness FTP SMB Default Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Server Confirmation Shared Folder Default Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex a This option may not be available depending on your country b Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 34 Menu overview Print Setup see Print on page 221 Orientation Portrait Landscape Duplex Copies Resolution Clear Text Off Minimum Normal Maximum Skip Blank Pages Auto CR Emulation Emulation Type Setup Machine Setup Machine ID Fax Number Date amp Time Clock Mode Language Default Mode Power Save Wakeup Event
101. For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any 2 For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk around before For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static Sound gt Printers electricity again e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers When installing accessories the battery inside the machine is a service component Do not change it by yourself There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used batteries according to e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt the instructions Devices and Printers For Windows 8 search for Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties 3 Maintenance 101 Installing accessories LS is U an LS If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer Select Device Options The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using Select the appropriate option Some menus may not
102. For the model with a touch screen press back to go back to the previous screen Go to step 5 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options 5 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 83 Using USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device Printing from a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device and then press Direct USB gt USB Print on the control panel File is supported by Direct Print option OR PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are EI For the model with a touch screen select _ Direct USB gt Print From compatible gt Next on the touch screen 2 Select the folder or file you want and press OK If you see or D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder If you print PRN files created from other machine the printout would be different TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline For the model with a touch screen select the folder or file you want JPEG JPEG Baseline 3 Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number PRE PDP 1 DOr lower version 4 Press OK Start or Print to start printing the selected file After printing the file the display asks if you want to print another job For the model with a touch screen press Pr
103. Internet to use this feature Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper layout emulation networking and print information through SyncThru Web Service Your machine needs to be connected to a network This button will be disabled if your machine is connected via USB cable Device List amp Latest Scanned 6 Image The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung Printer Experience Under the device you can see the latest scanned images Your machine needs to be connected to a network to scan from here This section is for the users with multi functional printers Adding Deleting Printers If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience or if you want to add delete a printer follow the instructions below 2 You can only add delete network connected printers Adding a printer 1 From the Charms select Settings Or right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings 2 Select Add Printer 3 Select the printer you want to add You can see the added printer K If you see mark you can also click mark to add printers 5 Useful Management Tools Using Samsung Printer Experience Deleting a printer Select the printer settings such as the number of copies and orientation onet ET 5 Click the Print button to start the print job 1 rom the Charms select Settings Or right cl
104. L printer driver PCL printer driver PS printer driver XPS printer driver Direct Printing Utility Samsung Easy Printer Manager Scan to PC Settings Fax to PC Settings Device Settings Samsung Printer Status Samsung AnyWeb Print Samsung Easy Document Creator Features by models Software M337xseries M387xseries M407xseries Easy Capture Manager SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Admin Web Service Easy Eco Driver Fax Samsung Network PC Fax Scan Twain scan driver WIA scan driver a Download the software from the Samsung website and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Before installing check whether your computer s OS support the software e Included Blank Not available Features by models Various features Features M337x series M387x series M407 x series Hi Speed USB 2 0 Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 Base TX wired LAN Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX wired LAN IEEE 1284B parallel connector O Network Interface 802 11b g n wireless LAN M387xFW only Google Cloud Print AirPrint Eco printing Duplex 2 sided printing USB memory interface Memory module Optional tray Tray2 Mass Storage Device Document Duplex Automatic Document Fe
105. Language panel display MachineID amp Fax Each fax page that you send Number When the problems in the machine occur some error Troubleshooting messages are shown with animations to help you solve Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of ing jams PavNiumbar x nu which wi pri p the problems see Clearing jams on page 116 each fax page that you send 3 Useful Setting Menus 238 System setup Item Default Mode Description Sets the machine s default mode among fax mode copy mode or scan mode Default Paper Size You can set the default paper size to use Power Save Sets how long the machine waits before going to power save mode When the machine does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered System Timeout Sets the time that the machine remembers previously used copy settings After the timeout the machine restores the default copy settings Item Auto Continue Description Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match the paper settings e OSec This option allows you to continue printing when the paper size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray e 30 Sec If a paper mismatch occurs an error message will display The machine waits for about 30 second then automatically clear the message and continue printing e Off If a paper mismatch occurs the
106. Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website KA e Internet Explorer 8 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru Web Service 2 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to e SyncThru Web Service explanation in this user s guide may differ from change the default password for security reasons hi pa your machine depending on its options or models ID admin e Network model only see Software on page 8 Password sec00000 Accessing SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Web Service overview 1 Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows ff Information Address Book Settings Security Maintenance Enter the machine IP address of your printer http xxx XXX Xxx xxXx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go KU Some tabs may not appear depending on your model 2 Your machine s embedded website opens Logging into SyncThru Web Service Information tab Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but you won t have access to Settings tab and Security tab This tab gives you general information about your machine You can check things such as remaining amount of toner You can also print reports such as an error report Active Alerts Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their severity Supplies
107. Opening printing preferences on page 64 Item Description You can select the authentication methods to use for secure release feature You can select more than one method for authentication For example if you select Card and PIN users need to be authorized by both card and PIN number You can change the default login window from the SyncThru Web Service Options k e Card You can register the card to use for authentication ID PW You can register the ID PW to use for authentication e PIN You can register the PIN number to user for authentication You can see the jobs currently submitted in the machine and their information 3 Useful Setting Menus 256 4 Special Features This chapter explains special copying scanning faxing and printing features Altitude adjustment Storing email address Entering various characters Setting up the address book Registering authorized users Printing features Scan features Fax features Using shared folder features Using optional device features Altitude adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine for the best print quality Before you set the altitude value determine the altitude where you are SOOO nn GA E 16 404 ft 4 000 m 13 123 ft 3 000 m 9 842 ft 2 000 m 6 561 ft 1 0
108. Printing la This favorite enables you to print as confidential in pri A Currently connected printer doesn t support this feature re ma Delete F e You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing see Easy Eco Driver on page 315 e You can check the machine s current status pressing the Printer Status button see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 324 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 64 Basic printing Using a favorite setting KA To use a saved setting select it in the Favorites tab The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected To delete saved settings select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete The Favorites option which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences for future use To save a Favorites item follow these steps 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and Favorites press F1 on your keyboard Orientation x Landscape Layout Options x Layout Poster Printing Post 3 Click Save 4 Enter name and description and then select the desired icon 5 Click OK When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Gg Basic printing The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper u
109. S o AAA A HR mB A AS BE A SA EY LANE SJ T 11363 2006 KMETA WERI J o 5 Appendix ga Copyright 2013 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Internet Explorer Excel Word PowerPoint and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Google Picasa Google Cloud Print Google Docs Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc iPad iPhone iPod touch Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 2 04 5 Appendix 164 User s Guide Samsung Multifunction ProXpress M337x series M387x series M407x series ADVANCED This g
110. Scanning on page 75 Email You can send the scanned image as an email attachment See Scanning to email on page 287 4 Special Features 285 Scan features Setting the scan settings in the computer 5 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager see Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager on page 321 Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List Select Scan to PC Settings menu Select the option you want Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device Basic tab Contains settings related to general scan and device settings Image tab Contains settings related to image altering Press Save 5 OK Scanning from network connected machine KU This feature is not available for the machine that does not support the network interface see Rear view on page 22 Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software CD since the printer driver includes the scan program see Installing the driver locally on page 28 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 2 Select scan gt Scan To PC gt Network PC on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select rx Scan 5 Network PC 5 Next gt select the scan destination yo
111. Select pi fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Speed Dial on the control panel OR For a one digit 0 9 speed dial number press and hold the corresponding digit Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View Lists gt Individual For a two or three digit speed dial number press the first digit button s and gt BES options gt Add on the touch screen in 7 then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds E ial K 2 er pE ea Ea EO For the model with a touch screen press gh Fax gt Speed Dial Send or Group For the model with a touch screen enter the name fax number email Dial Send gt Next You can select the number you want address and speed dial number Press Back and go to step 5 2 ifan entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the message to allow you to change it To start over with another speed dial number press 3 Enter the name you want and press OK 4 Special Features 263 Setting up the address book Editing speed dial numbers Registering a group dial number q Select pis fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Speed Dial on J Select pi fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Group Dial on the control panel the control panel OR OR For the model with a touch screen select o Setup 5 Machine For the model with a touch screen select o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Addres
112. Select the option you want see Understanding special printer features on page 271 7 Select OK From the control panel If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive you can use these features Press Menu button gt Job Management on the control panel 4 Special Features 309 Using optional device features OR For the model with a touch screen press _ Document Box gt Next gt System Boxes on the touch screen Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Active Job All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer You can delete a job from the queue before printing or promote a job to print sooner Secured Job You can print or delete a secured job Shows the list of secured jobs the user has set in the printer driver You need to enter the user name and password set in the printer driver Stored Job You can print or delete a stored job File Policy You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through optional memory If the optional memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it 4 Special Features gg 5 Useful Management Tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine Accessing management t
113. Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge 5 Useful Management Tools BO Using SyncThru Web Service Usage Counters Shows the usage count by print types simplex and Security tab duplex Current Settings Shows the machine s and network s information This tab allows you to set system and network security information You need to a log in as an administrator to view this tab Security Information Shows the machine s security information System Security Sets the system administrator s information and also Print information Prints reports such as system related reports e mail anbe or dicab les aa chine teasers address and font reports Network Security Sets settings for HTTPs IPSec IPv4 IPv6 filtering 802 1x and Authentication servers Address Book tab User Access Control You can choose authentication methods modes for user authentication You can add delete modify the user profile used for Local Authentication You can manage the address book This feature is also available from the machine System Log The System Log contains settings related to logs of device Individual You can manage individual entries in the address book events Group You can manage group address books Log Configuration The Log Configuration section contains settings related to saving logs Settings tab Log Viewer The Log Viger section contains options to view logs stored locally on
114. System Timeout Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Auto Continue Auto Tray Switch Paper Substitution Tray Protection Toner Save PDF Type Stamp Import Setting Export Setting Eco Settings System Setup see System setup on page 238 Paper Setup Paper Size Tray 1 Tray 2 MP Tray Manual Feeder Default Paper Size Paper Type Tray 1 Tray 2 MP Tray Manual Feeder Paper Source Margin Tray Confirmation Sound Volume Key Sound Alarm Sound Fax Sound a Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine b This is only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru Web Admin Service c This option only appears when small amount of toner is in the cartridge Report Configuration Demo Page Network Configuration Supplies Information Usage Counter Account Fax Received Fax Sent Fax Schedule Jobs Fax Send Confirmation Junk Fax Email Sent PCL Font PS Font EPSON Font KSC5843 Font KSC5895 Font KSSM Font Address Book Maintenance CLR Empty Msg Supplies Life Image Mgr Custom Color Toner Low Alert Imaging Unit Low Alert Serial Number RAM Disk Image Overwrite Manual Overwrite Method Overwrite Times 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup D Menu overview Network see Network setup on page 248 TCP IP IPv4 DHCP BOOTP Static TCP IP IPv6 IPv6 Protocol DHCPv6
115. Telephone line see Rear view on page 22 Preparing to fax Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to your telephone wall jack see Rear view on page 22 Refer to the Quick Installation Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is different from one country to another Sending a fax WA When you place the originals you can use either the document feeder or the scanner glass If the originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first which has higher priority in scanning 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Select le fax on the control panel 2 S OR For the model with a touch screen select padirax gt Memory Send gt Next on the touch screen 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup I Basic faxing 3 En Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs see Adjusting the document settings on page 79 For the model with a touch screen press TIN Option settings gt select the option you want using arrows 5 back gt Next on the touch screen Enter the destination fax number using the number keypad on the control panel see Understanding keypad on page 261 For the model with a touch screen press Direct Input or Fax
116. The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security setting Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next e WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key The window showing the wireless network settings appears Check the settings and click Next 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 205 Wireless network setup 13 When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is 2 Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the confirmed appears disconnect the network cable and click Next computer s network configuration information If the computer s network configuration is set to DHCP the wireless network setting should also be DHCP Likewise if the computer s network configuration is set to Static the wireless network setting should also be Static If the network cable is connected it may have trouble finding the machine when configuring the wireless network 14 The wireless network connects according to the network configuration If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP 15 Wireless network set up is completed After installation is finished click address Q
117. To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts q Press fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Sending on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen 2 Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want 3 Select the option you want Redialing the fax number 1 Press Redial Pause button on the control panel 2 Select the fax number you want Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown 3 When an original is loaded in the document feeder the machine starts to scan and automatically begins to send If an original is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully the machine beeps and returns to ready mode When something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display If you receive an error message press Stop or Stop Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax again 4 Special Features l Fax features 3 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each time sending a fax is completed 4 Click Print or OK Press des fax gt Menu gt Fax Set
118. User s Guide Samsung Multifunction ProXpress M337x series M387x series M407x series BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on windows BASIC 1 Introduction Key benefits 5 3 Maintenance Features by models 8 Using USB memory device 81 Ordering supplies and accessories 89 peer al te Available consumables 90 a im paka i guide 14 Available accessories 91 3o ey MaN ON lg Storing the toner cartridge 92 Ka ena ee Redistributing toner 94 Control panel overview mi Replacing the toner cartridge 97 Turning on the machine 27 5 Replacing the imaging unit 100 Installing the driver locally 28 Installing accessories 101 Reinstalling the driver 3p Monitoring the supplies life 105 Setting the toner low alert 106 Tips for moving amp storing your machine 113 Menu overview 32 Machine s basic settings 45 4 T blesh z Media and tray 47 D pi FOUD eseou madi printing os Tips for avoiding paper jams 115 ae i a Z0 Clearing jams 116 Pasic scanning sa Understanding the status LED 134 Basic faxing 76 Understanding display messages 137 D 5 Appendix Specifications 144 Regulatory information 152 Copyright 164 1 Introduction This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine Key benefits Features by models Useful to know About this user s guide Safety information Machine overview Control panel overv
119. Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and or a network interface Supports various wireless network setting method _ cc E o e Using the WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup button You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on the machine and the access point a wireless router Using the USB cable or a network cable You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB cable or a network cable e Using the Wi Fi Direct You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi Fi or Wi Fi Direct feature 2 See Introducing wireless set up methods on page 191 Key benefits Support XOA applications M407xFX only XOd SAMSUNG eXtensible Open Architecture The machine supports XOA custom applications e Regarding the XOA custom applications please contact your XOA custom application provider Features by models Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country Operating System Operating System M337x series M387 x series M407x series Windows Mac Linux Unix e Included Blank Not available Software You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive For windows select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window Software M337x series M387x series M407x series SP
120. ad hoc network in Mac click Quit 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and A After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a powered on machine driver to print from an application see Installation for Mac on page 169 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point AP you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following these simple directions 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop For Mac OS X 10 8 double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Items to prepare Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine Hik Contlnue A machine installed with a wireless network interface Read the license agreement and click Continue USEcaule Click Agree to agree to the license agreement O N AO UW A Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install 9 Enter the password and click OK 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 204 Wireless network setup 1 0 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue O Printer Connection Type Select how the printer will be connected to
121. age 175 Follow the instructions in the installation window 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive From the Windows 8 Start Screen K e The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet If not you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the If the installation window does not appear click Start gt All programs gt Windows Store You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Accessories gt Run Store a From Charms select Search X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD b Click Store ROM drive andidick OK c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience For Windows 8 d Click Install Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing installed If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen you can X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK download from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window i If you want to install Samsung s printer management tools you need to appears click the window and select Run Setup exe install them using the supplied software CD 3 Review and accept the in
122. age 8 scanned data in the shared folder You can directly print files stored on a the e You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device shared folder You can print TIFF JPEG and PRN files see Various features on page 10 e The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user s access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users Creating a shared folder Open the Windows Explore window from the computer 1 2 Enter the printer s ip address example 169 254 133 42 in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 3 Create a new folder under nfsroot directory 4 Special Features gg Using optional device features Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported see Various features on page 10 From the printer driver If you install the optional device you can use advanced printing features such as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window Check the mass storage or RAM Disk option in Device Options then you can select the various features from Print Mode see Setting Device Options on page 101 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 3 Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list 4 Click Properties or Preferences 5 Click the each tab then select Print Mode 6
123. al goods see Front view on page 21 4 Troubleshooting 132 Clearing jams Original paper jam in scanner duplex path 2 e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model supported duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF see Various features on page 10 4 Troubleshooting 133 Understanding the status LED The color of the LED indicates the machine s current status 2 e Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country see Control panel overview on page 23 To resolve the error look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part see Understanding display messages on page 137 You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers s Samsung Printing Status window see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 324 e Ifthe problem persists call a service representative 4 Troubleshooting 134 Understanding the status LED LED Status Description Off e The machine is off line e The machine is in power save mode Blinking When the backlight blinks the machine is receiving or printing data Green On e The machine is on line and can be used e A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the
124. ame SMB Destination DEE Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution rx Scan see Scan on page 234 Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF Duplex Darkness File Name FTP Destination WET Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF Duplex Darkness File Name Custom Email From To CC BCC Subject Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF Duplex Darkness File Name USB WET Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF File Policy Duplex Darkness File Name Shared Folder WET Option settings Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Digital Signature in PDF File Policy Duplex Darkness File Name WSD Destination a This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI Menu overview Memory Send To WET Option settings Darkness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex On Hook Dial To WENN Option settings Darkness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex pa Fax see Fax on page 228 Delayed Send Start Time To BEB Option settings Dark
125. an internal embedded wireless device do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information 5 Appendix 162 Regulatory information China only Pe tn PA BEA ERIR AY A N HUAI AHA WERTE GH Ha Pb Hg i Cd TOME Cr BRA PBB L RIKATE PBDE e EE PE x EID fi Ha ABE PCA BUKAKA T EF my ELEME FAR BEE CCD WREE x O0O O0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O x Rx K K kK KK XxX X FH MAB HE WRH Xx EPI HA BR AEE PBA ojoj x o lo o o O0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o O10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O RAAT RA ED ETA AEE IT BY RH X RANA EA ERB TEE I E E UERN AWA ING NAGA Ems Ma ASA rl RCE abet Ji EPR EEDA BA BORACE PETTY 1HRS PREE SIT 11363 2006 PRUE xe HIERA F EH SJ T 11363 2006 titi LE AY BE BE
126. an print Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set upa network e TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program First you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview 4 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server located on the network on page 32 e lt may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models IPv4 configuration using SetIP Windows The machine has a display screen Press the Menu button on the Before using the SetIP program disable the computer firewall from Control control panel and select Network gt Network Configuration Panel gt Security Center gt Windows Firewall The machine has a touch screen Press Gp Setup on the touch screen 5 Machine Setup gt Next gt Reports gt Network Configuration 9 The following instructions may differ for your model Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine s MAC address and IP address 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wired network setup uu Bb W N e2 Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Foll
127. and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper the machine automatically prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper K This option does not appear if you selected Auto for Paper Source from printer driver Item Toner Save Description Activating this mode extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page beyond what one would experience in the normal mode but it reduces print quality Paper Substitution Automatically substitutes the printer driver s paper size to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4 For example if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper size to Letter in the printer driver the machine prints on A4 paper and vice versa Tray Protection Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature If you set tray 1 to On for example then tray 1 is excluded during tray switching K This setting works for copy or print jobs It doesn t affect fax jobs PDF Type Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as a PDF file e Standard Saves the data as a regular PDF e PDF A Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary information to render itself in any environment K PDF A file must be self contained it cannot rely on another application to render fonts open hyperlinks or execute scripts audio files or video files Stamp You can apply the stamp feature Stamp Activate You can activate
128. are using Items to prepare Check if the access point or wireless router supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Check if your machine supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Networked computer PIN mode only 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 192 Wireless network setup Machines with a display screen Connecting in PBC mode 1 Select Menu gt Network gt Wi Fi gt WPS Setting on the control panel OR For models that have the 9 WPS button on the control panel press and hold the O WPS button on the control panel for more than 2 seconds Press PBC or Connect via PBC Press OK when the confirmation window appears Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing time Press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below a Connecting The machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router b Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on c AP SSID After completing the wireless network connection process the AP s SSID information appears on the display 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network Connecting in PIN mode 1 Select C3 Menu gt Network gt Wi Fi gt WPS Setting on the control panel OR For
129. at can be used in the command window 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 180 Installing driver over the network Command line p lt port name gt or P lt port name gt Definition Specifies printer port KU Network Port will be created by use of Standard TCP IP Port monitor For local port this port must exist on system before being specified by command Printer port name can be specified as IP address Description Command line a dest paths or A lt dest_path gt hostname USB local port name IEEE1284 port name or network path For example P XXX XXX XXX XXX N where XXxX XXX XXX XXX Definition Specifies destination path for installation The destination path should be a fully qualified path Description Since machine drivers should be installed on the OS specific location this command applies to only application software means IP address for n lt Printer name gt Specifies printer name Printer instance shall be created as specified printer name With this parameter you can add printer instances as your wishes network printer or p USBOO1 P LPT1 p hostname N lt Printer name gt p computer_name share nd or d_printer or ND XXX XXX XXX XXX shared_ printer in where computer_name shared _printer or XXX XXX XXX XXX shared_ printer means the network pa
130. ayout used in book binding Short Edge Binding This option is the type often used with calendars From your Mac application select Print from the File menu Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation Select a binding orientation from the Two Sided option Select the other options to use If you print more than 2 copies the first copy and the second copy might print on the same sheet of paper Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy 1 2 3 4 5 Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper A Click the question mark on the bottom left corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about A pop up window appears with information about that option s feature which is provided from the driver Printer 10 88 181 197 RA Presets Standard Mm Copies GU M Collated Two Sided Pages All cp OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 A 20 99 by 29 70 cm Orientation 6 1G Layout Z Pages per Sheet 1 Z Layout Direction 2 Ss un Border None Z Two Sided Off E l Reverse Page Orientation OED Ci dion Caneel CD K Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported 4 Special Features 281 Printing features Printing from applications Printing files There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Print
131. be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine 5 The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red 5 Appendix 159 Regulatory information You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of conformity European countries Approvals and Certifications Hereby Samsung Electronics declares that this M337x M387x M407x series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Cf January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to l
132. chine status toner cartridge shortage or machine error will be sent to a certain person s email automatically Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based machine management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com SetIP wired network setup This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See IPv4 configuration using SetIP Windows on page 175 See IPv4 configuration using SetIP Mac on page 176 See IPv4 configuration using SetIP Linux on page 177 The machine that does not support the network port it will not be able 4 to use this feature see Rear view on page 22 e TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wired network setup For example Printing a network configuration report MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 IP Address 169 254 192 192 Setting IP address The machine that does not support the network interface it will not be 4 able to use this feature see Rear view on page 22 You c
133. creen Select Setup Data Address Book Select the file you want to restore Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home A icon to return to ready mode Managing USB memory You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 85 Using USB memory device If you see or D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder A After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be restored Therefore confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it Deleting an image file 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Press Direct USB gt File Manage gt Delete on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select iv Direct USB gt File Manage gt Next gt select the folder or file you want gt WIT Option settings gt Delete on the touch screen 3 Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears 4 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Select Direct USB gt File Manage gt Format on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select c Direct USB gt File Manage gt
134. cts the default fax receiving mode see Changing Receive M eceive Mode the receive modes on page 303 Specifies the number of times the machine rings before Ring To Answer i answering an incoming call Item Stamp Rcv Name Stamp Received Name Description Automatically prints the page number and the date and time of reception at the bottom of each page of a received fax e Rev Start Code e Receive Start Code Initiates fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the machine If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones enter the code It is preset to 9 at the factory Auto Reduction Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine Discard Size Discards a specific length from the end of the received fax Junk Fax Setup This setting may not be available depending on your country Using this feature the system will not accept faxes sent from remote stations whose numbers are stored in the memory as junk fax numbers This feature is useful for blocking any unwanted faxes When you turn on this feature you can access the following options to set junk fax numbers DRPD Mode Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers You can set the machine to recognize different ring patterns for each number This setting may not be availab
135. d Eco options Printer Default Follows the settings from the machine s control panel None Disables Eco mode Eco Printing Enables Eco mode Activate the various Eco items you want to use Passcode If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode you have to enter the password to change the status KA Passcode button You can set from SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings 5 Eco the password button is activated To change the print settings click on this button enter the password or need to contact the administrator Result simulator Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide used electricity and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed paper is one hundred without a blank page when the Eco mode is disabled Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2 energy and paper from IEA the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www remanufacturing org uk Each model has a different index 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic printing The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing Starting secure printing from the SyncTh ru Web power consumption of this machine Service The actual amount displayed is only an estimate a
136. d line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted Glossary Glossary NetWare OSI A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush cleaning mechanism and paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Tra
137. d password Press Apply 4 Special Features Scan features 5 Enter an email subject and press OK 2 e Ifthe authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication e Enter the IP address and port number For the model with a touch screen press Direct Input or Address Book gt enter the email address using number keypad on the touch screen 6 Select the file format to scan and press OK For the model with a touch screen press BEJ Option settings gt select the option you want using arrows gt Start button on the touch screen Scanning and sending an email 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on 7 The machine begins scanning and then sends the email page 59 Select scan gt Scan to Email on the control panel r 2 Scanning to FTP SMB server OR For the model with a touch screen select rs Scan 5 Email 5 Next on e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 the touch screen 3 Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Setting up an FTP SMB server Enter the sender s and recipient s email address 2 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service
138. d to the current fax job To change the default setting see Fax on page 228 1 Select aes fax 5 CB Menu gt Fax Feature gt Darkness on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select gak Fax gt WK Option settings 5 Darkness on the touch screen Select a darkness level you want For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows Press back to go back to the previous screen g Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home fy icon to return to ready mode 7 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EJ Using USB memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine WA This USB memory device is supported for M387x M407x series see Various features on page 10 About USB memory USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device Print data stored on a USB memory device Restore backup files to the machine s memory Format the USB memory device Check the available memory space Plugging in a USB memory device The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USBV1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machi
139. dge is not installed Install the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 If a system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it see Rear view on page 22 the machine is not connected properly The connection cable between the computer and If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job the machine is defective You can also try using a different machine cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one 6 Troubleshooting 339 Printing problems Condition The machine does not print Possible cause The machine may be configured incorrectly Suggested solutions Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Uninstall and reinstall the machine s driver The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative The document si
140. dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone 8 Help Gives detailed information about this machine s menus or status 9 Reset Resets user setting for a job to default value 10 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine see Understanding the status LED on page 134 1 Introduction 26 Turning on the machine 2 Turn the power switch on KA Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 1 Connect the machine to the electricity supply first 1 Introduction Installing the driver locally A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following Windows steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine s driver see Installing ANYErOYEFHIE PETOK ONipade lt 176 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Ifyouarea Mac Linux or UNIX operating systems user refer to the Installation for Mac on page 169 or Installation for Linux on page 171 2 or Installing the UNIX printer driver package on page 184 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive e Theinstallation window in this User s Guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use e Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 me
141. display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes Blinking Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for gee replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 94 Red A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 e The cover is opened Close the cover On e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message see Understanding display messages on page 137 e A paper jam has occurred see Clearing jams on page 116 An imaging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network Wireless Blue On The machine is connected to a wireless network see Wireless network setup on page 190 Off The machine is disconnected from a wireless network 4 Troubleshooting 135 Understanding the status LED LED Status Description On The machine is in power save mode Power Blue oft The machine is in ready mode or machine s power is off Wake Up On Eco mode is on see Eco printing on page 66 Eco Green Off Eco mode is off
142. documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 select the option you want using arrows gt Start button on the touch screen Scanning begins 2 Select scan gt Scan To PC on the control panel 5 OR WA Scanned image is saved in computer s C Users users name My 7 Documents The saved folder may differ depending on your operating For the model with a touch screen select r3 Scan 5 Local PC on the system or the application you are using touch screen 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup I Basic faxing L For special faxing features refer to the Advanced Guide see Fax features on page 297 Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 or Control panel overview on page 23 You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone For more information ask your internet service provider We recommend using traditional analog phone services PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network when connecting telephone lines to use a fax machine If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro filter 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem
143. duct gt Support or Downloads About this user s guide This user s guide provides information for your basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage Read the safety information before using the machine If you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter All illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model you purchased The screenshots in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on the machine s firmware driver version The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on Windows 7 Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below Document is synonymous with original Paper is synonymous with media or print media Machine refers to printer or MFP General icons Icon Text Description i Gives users information to protect the machine from A Caution possible mechanical damage or malfunction Used to alert users to the possibility of personal injury A Warning Provides additional information or detailed a Note specification of the machine function and feature 1 Introduction la Safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others and to prevent any potential damage to your machine Be sure to read Ope
144. dvanced Guide see Using advanced print features on page 270 Select Printer Status E Print to file Location 2 e Ifyou are a Mac Linux or UNIX operating systems user refer to the Comment y Advanced Guide see Software Installation on page 168 Page Range ga ee N ma For Windows 8 user see Basic printing on page 328 uti esas Selection Current Page Pages The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 4 The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window Totake advantage of the advanced printing features click Properties or Preferences from the Print window see Opening printing preferences on page 64 5 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Basic printing Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon a in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop or Stop Clear button on the control panel 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 63 Basic printing Opening printing preferences A W N The Printing Prefere
145. dvanced printing features when using your machine To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print settings The machine name that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use WA e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Select the Help menu or click the button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click on any option you want to know about see Using help on page 65 Item Multiple Pages Per Side a rr Description Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet Poster Printing alar AED a nar A 3x3 Prints a single page document onto 4 Poster 2x2 9 Poster 3x3 or 16 Poster 4x4 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together ar4 10 mm 5 m iain BIN C S 4 Special Features Printing feat
146. e 305 Secure Receive Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory C I Job ere see Canceling a reserved fax job on page 299 Save Program This option allows you to save the current settings for future use You can also use the previous settings from the last jobs Sending setup KA Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 Load Program 3 Useful Setting Menus 229 Fax To change the menu options Item Description Press d fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Sending on the control panel FaxConfirmation Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax Fax Send transmission was successfully completed or not e For the model with a touch screen press O Setup 5 Machine Setup 5 Confirmation Next 5 Default Setting 5 Fax Default on the touch screen e If you select On Error the machine prints a e Forthe model with a touch screen press g Setup gt Machine Setup gt report only when a transmission is not Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen successful Item Description Select the maximum modem speed you want if the Modem speed phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed You Sets the number of redial attempts If you enter 0 the can select 33 6 28 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 or 4 8 kbps machine will not redial Redial Times Prints a transmission
147. e Book gt View Lists gt Group gt BSE options gt Search on the touch screen Enter All or ID and press OK For the model with a touch screen enter the name number or letter you want to search and press OK from the keyboard Go to step 4 Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter you want to search For example if you want to find the name MOBILE press the 6 button which is labeled with MNO Press Stop Clear button or home ED icon to return to ready mode Exporting Address Book This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV file format using SyncThru Web Service 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 2 Click Address Book tab gt Individual 3 Select Export form the Task drop down list 4 Select the option you want and click the Export button Then the address book file stored in your computer Importing Address Book You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the machine by exporting to the machine from your computer 2 Followings are the conditions for editing the imported CSV file e Password protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited e The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF 8 e Do not change th
148. e IP address of your device click Set IP Address Button Rm o Configuration of Wireless network This is for users who have not set up the wireless connection before The installer will help you set up the wireless network Select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer Continue After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of the access point you want to use and click Next e When you set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID of the access point SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select Infrastructure 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 202 Wireless network setup e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based on the WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase that is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients e Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP 128 TKIP AES TKIP AES e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Passw
149. e MAC Installer folder 5 Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Click Agree to agree to the license agreement Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed O N QAU A If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install 9 Enter the password and click OK 10 Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue 11 Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer list If your machine supports fax click Add Fax button to select your fax and add it to your fax list 1 2 After the installation is finished click Close 1 Software Installation 169 Reinstallation for Mac If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it if uh W N Open the Applications folder gt Samsung gt Printer Software Uninstaller To uninstall printer software click Continue Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall Enter the password and click OK After the uninstallation is finished click Close If a machine has already been added delete it from the Print Setup Utility or Print amp Fax 1 Software Installation Installation for Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Installing th
150. e The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Installing a WSD Printer Driver Select Iscan gt Scan to WSD on the control panel w 1 Select Start gt Control Panel gt Devices and Printers gt Add a printer 2 Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard K If you see Not Available message check the port connection Or check the printer driver for WSD is correctly installed 3 In the printers list select the one you want to use and then click Next 4 Select your computer name from Destination List 4 Special Features 290 Scan features 5 Select the option you want and press OK 6 Scanning begins Scanning with cloud service You should be registered to a Google Drvie Dropbox and Evernote account to use this function 2 This feature is only available for models with a touch screen Logging into Google Drive Dropbox and Evernote Google Drvie Dropbox and Evernote follow each cloud s log in policy q Press 17 Scan to Cloud on the touch screen 2 Select the cloud service where you want to send the scanned data Enter the cloud service account and password to access the cloud service you selected 2 To log in automatically check Enable Auto Login gt press OK To log in using a different account
151. e Unified Linux Driver 1 N Aa UW Kk Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on When the Administrator Login window appears type root in the Login field and enter the system password You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator From the Samsung website download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package Double click cdroot gt autorun When the welcome screen appears click Next When the installation is complete click Finish The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager 1 Software Installation Reinstallation for Linux If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type root in the Login field and enter the system password You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer driver If you are not a super user ask your system administra
152. e completes page 59 the copy in progress e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview 3 If you want to customize the copy settings including reduce enlarge on page 32 darkness original type and more by using the control panel see It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for Changing the settings for each copy on page 70 some models For the model with a touch screen press Option settings gt select the option you want gt fb back 4 Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad if necessary 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup i Basic copying Darkness Original Type If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read 1 Select G O copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature gt Darkness on the control Tanel Or press a on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select gt Copy gt WET Option settings 5 Darkness on the touch screen Select the option you want For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows For example the Light 5 being the lightest and the Dark 5 being the darkest Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home A icon to return to ready mode The original settin
153. e control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized Glossary ga Glossary DHCP DPI A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network DNS Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a
154. e depending on its Eco Ng You can view the eco settings see Eco on page 252 i h Is oprionsar Memgdel Direct USB You can enter the USB menu when USB memory is inserted e The menus are described in the Advanced Guide see Useful Setting Kg into the USB memory port on your machine see USB on Menus on page 219 page 253 Document You can store the printing data print the secure page or Box shared folder see Document box on page 254 Scan to You can scan an image and the scanned data will be stored Introducing the touch screen Cloud in the cloud service see Scanning with cloud service on page 291 Secure cH Displays the list of jobs stored in the machine You can Oo Release pJ delete or print the stored jobs on the list You can also register authentication methods to print stored jobs see O o Secure release on page 256 Option EJ You want to customize the option settings including Settings darkness original type and more lt Yy Toner Status You can see the toner status 4 2 Ea G E Bate x Arrows You can scroll through the options available in the selected menu and increase or decrease values You can go back to the previous screen Back U When you press Copy from the display screen the Copy Ba You can select the LCD brightness language and you can screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying edit home menu options see Copy on page 222
155. e first row model name version title field e Use comma as a separator 4 Special Features 266 Setting up the address book When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine 1 Select ct pa fax gt Address Book gt Print on the control panel the existing address book data is deleted e Make sure to enter valid data If you enter invalid data unexpected errors a can occur Refer to the below rules for entering valid data For the model with a touch screen select o Setup gt Machine Speed dial A number is required for each address You cannot use Setup gt Next gt Report gt Address Book on the touch screen duplicate numbers Only numbers are allowed UserName This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 64 byte 2 Press OK in UTF 8 lt gt in not allowed I For the model with a touch screen press Yes when the confirmation Fax This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 40 byte using windows appears numbers 0 9 and special characters E mail This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 128 byte in The machine begins printing email address format ex printer domain com 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Click Address Book tab gt Individual Select Import form the Task drop down list Select Browse and select the stored file uu A W N Click Import gt OK Printing addres
156. e for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters 6 feet with a 110V machine then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine and could result in electric shock or fire Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine Do not clean the machine with benzene paint thinner or alcohol do not spray water directly into the machine This could result in electric shock or fire O Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location such as a closet If the machine is not well ventilated this could result in fire When you are working inside the machine replacing consumables or cleaning the inside do not operate the machine You could get injured O Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and could result in electric shock or fire Keep cleaning consumables away from children Children could get hurt O The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using contact the electrical utility company a AWG American Wire Gauge Do not disassemble repair or rebuild the machine by yourself It can damage the machine Call a certified technician when the machine needs repairing To clean and operate the machine strictl
157. e of a copied image from 2596 to 40096 when you copy original documents from the scanner glass see b Reduce Enlarge Reduced or enlarged copy on page 72 Direct USB Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine 21 Eco Turn on the Eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc printing and copying only see Eco printing on page 66 a M387xFW only b M337xFD M337xHD only c M387x M407x series only 1 Introduction 24 Control panel overview M407xFX WA When using the touch screen only use your finger Sharp objects can damage the screen SN N G3 EN oO bec Bere See Sd D Dm 10 9 8 7 6 1 Touch screen Displays the current status and allows you to access available menus see Introducing the touch screen on page 37 2 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters see Understanding pop up keyboard on page 262 3 Clear Deletes characters in the edit area Stops an operation at any time Stop 5 Power Wake Up Turns the power on or off or wakes up the machine from the power save mode If you need to turn the machine off press this button for more than three seconds 1 Introduction 25 00O Control panel overview 6 Starts a job Start 7 On Hook Dial O When you press this button you can hear a
158. e paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 A a C The paper path may need cleaning If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative see Cleaning the A 8C machine on page 107 A alec A aie Ae c Dropouts If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set type to Thick see Opening printing preferences on page 64 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative White Spots If white spots appear on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 e The paper path may need cleaning Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 If these steps do not correct the problem contac
159. e port is occupied by another application If this is the case you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly The machine does not scan e Ensure a document is loaded into the machine ensure your machine is connected to the computer e If there is an I O error while scanning K Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used 6 Troubleshooting 359 Operating system problems Problem The PostScript file cannot be printed Possible cause The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly Solution e Install the PostScript driver see Software Installation on page 168 e Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing Ifthe problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine
160. e specific functions This section also includes links to applications in the advanced settings A if you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled Contents area Displays information about the selected machine remaining toner level and paper The information will vary based on the machine selected Some machines do not have this feature Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online K Select the Help menu or click the P button from the window Advanced settings user interface overview The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing the network and machines 5 Useful Management Tools ga Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Device Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper layout emulation network and print information Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device Basic tab Contains general scan and device settings Image tab Contains settings related to image altering Fax to PC Settings This menu includes settings related to
161. ect Name is the model name and the maximum length is 23 characters e Password setting is the numeric string and the size is 8 64 characters 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 198 Wireless network setup When the wireless network set up is completed disconnect the USB 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive cable between the computer and machine Click Next 1 1 Follow the instructions in the installation window Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point AP you may still connect the machine If the installation window does not appear click Start gt All programs gt wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad hoc wireless network by Accessories gt Run following the simple steps below X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK Items to prepare For Windows 8 Network connected computer P If the installation window does not appear from Charms select Software CD that was provided with your machine Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing MPR f X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK A machine installed with a wireless network interface If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window USB cable appears click the window and select Run Setup exe Creating the ad hoc network in Windows 4 Review and accept the installation agree
162. ect it If the problem continues refer to the Image Capture s help Select the option you want Scan and save your scanned image If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version 3 4 6 KU Network or wireless model only see Features by models on page 8 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Start Applications and click Image Capture According to OS follow steps below For 10 5 Click Devices gt Browse Devices on Menu bar Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices For 10 6 10 8 select your device below SHARED Set the scan options on this program Scan and save your scanned image 4 Special Features 294 Scan features KA e If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version e For more information refer to the Image Capture s help e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop e You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software Open the Applications folder 5 Samsung folder 5 Samsung Scan Assistant Scanning 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop 3 Click the Ss button to
163. ecure receiving mode KU This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people Turn on secure receiving mode then all incoming faxes go into memory You can print the incoming faxes by entering the password To use the secure receiving mode Loe e Press amp fax gt 9 Menu gt Fax Feature gt Secure Receive gt On on the control panel e Press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive on the touch screen 4 Special Features 305 Fax features Printing received faxes 1 Printing faxes on both sides of the paper L Select 45 fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Secure Receive gt Print on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive gt Print on the touch screen Enter a four digit password and press OK or Print The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Press am
164. ed When using the ad hoc mode in operating systems such as Windows Vista you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machines e The machine is within the range of the wireless network e The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal Remove any large metal objects between the access point or wireless router and the machine Make sure the machine and wireless access point or wireless router are not separated by poles walls or support columns containing metal or concrete e The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices Whenever the configuration of your access point or wireless router changes you must do the product s wireless network setup again The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is 3 If Wi Fi Direct is ON this machine only supports IEEE 802 11 b g If the access point is set to work with the 802 11n standard only it may not connect to your machine 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 214 Samsung Mobile Print What is Samsung Mobile Print Supported Mobile OS Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to
165. eder DADF Feeder M387xFW only M407xFR M407xHR M407xFX only Automatic Document Feeder ADF M387xFD M387xHD only M4072FD only Handset M337XHD only M387xHD only M407xHR only Features by models Features M337x series M387 x series M407x series Multi send 8 Delay send e Priority send Duplex send M387xFW only Secure receive Duplex print Send Receive forward fax Send Receive forward email Send Receive forward server Scanning to email Scanning to SMB server Scanning to FTP server Duplex scan M387xFW only M407xFR M407xHR M407xFX only Scan to PC e Features by models Features M337 x series M387x series M407x series ID card copying Reduced or enlarged copying Collation e Poster Clone Auto Fit Book 2 up 4 up Adjust background Margin shift Edge erase Gray enhance Duplex copy M387xFW only M407xFR M407xHR M407xFX only a If you use the parallel port you cannot use the USB cable b Depending on your country wireless LAN card may not be available For some countries only 802 11 b g can be applied Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine e Included o Optional Blank Not available Useful to know The machine does no
166. el Or select 3 Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Ta Copy 5 Custom Copy 5 WEN Option settings gt Reduce Enlarge on the touch screen Select the option you want For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows 4 Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 1 Select SB copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge gt Custom on the control panel Or select 3 Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge gt Custom on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Copy gt Custom Copy gt BE Option settings gt Reduce Enlarge gt Custom on the touch screen Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home fy icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying 1 Press ID Copy on the control panel Or select 3 Menu gt Copy When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of Feature gt Layout gt ID Copy on the control panel your copy OR For the model with a touch
167. el or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 Changing the default print settings 1 Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings 2 For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 8 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click on your machine 4 For Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2008 Vista select Printing Preferences For Windows 7 8 or Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select Printing preferences 2 If Printing preferences has a B you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer Change the settings on each tab 5 6 Click OK K If you want to change the settings for each print job change it in Printing Preferences Setting your machine as a default machine 1 Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings 2 For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 8 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 4 Special Features 269 Printing fea
168. en the File menu and click Print Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print Ul 6 Click Print Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following Printing multiple pages on one sheet You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft copies 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper 3 Select the other options to use 4 Click Print The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of paper 4 Special Features 280 Printing features Printing on both sides of the paper Using help Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported see Various features on page 10 Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding options are as follows Long Edge Binding This option is the conventional l
169. ens its useful shelf and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge properly Toner cartridge usage Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung Store lying flat not standing on end with the same side facing up as if it brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or were installed in the machine remanufactured toner cartridges e Donot store consumables in any of the following conditions Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused Humidity range less than 20 or greater than 80 by the use of a refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner cartridges An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places Acar fora long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present 3 Maintenance a2 Storing the toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment percentage of image area printing interval
170. enshot may differ depending on the model you are using can set device settings order supplies open troubleshooting guides visit Samsung s website and check connected machine information This application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the machine is Samsung Printer Experience lt a connected to a computer with an Internet connection Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience 2 aS User Guide To open the application gu 3 From the Start screen select the Samsung Printer Experience Ee tile EX j P 5 The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as GS described in the following table Printer This area gives you general information about your Information machine You can check information such as the machine s status location IP address and remaining toner level 5 Useful Management Tools 326 Using Samsung Printer Experience 2 User Guide You can view the online User s Guide You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature e This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide Order 3 Supplies Click on this button to order replacement toner cartridges online You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website You need to be connected to the
171. ent Creator Click Scan BK from the home screen program provided in the supplied sofware CD 4 Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start r Availabe for Windows OS users only Make adjustments to the image Scan Settings and More Options Ul e Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator I DO I ied 6 Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you image install the machine software see Using Samsung Easy Document Creator on page 320 7 Select to Save to Location Send to E mail or Send to SNS 8 Click on Save Saving a Scan Send E mailing a Scan or Share Uploading Q Ifthere is room on the document glass more than one item can be scanned at the same time Use the tool to make multiple selection areas 4 Special Features 293 Scan features Scanning from USB connected machine Scanning from network connected machine 1 w VI Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Start Applications and click Image Capture If No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconn
172. er Experience Advanced tab Samsung Printer Experience Advanced Paper settings This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications Layout settings This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents Security tab WA Some features may not be available depending on the model or options If this tab is not shown or disabled it means that this features are not supported Samsung Printer Experience Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission Confidential Printing This option is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print using it 5 Useful Management Tools 330 Using Samsung Printer Experience Using the sharing feature Scanning from Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning installed on the computer using the sharing feature 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 This feature is only available for printing jpeg bmp tiff gif and png file formats 2 Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen 3 Click Scan XX Select the content you want to print from other application 4 Set up the scanning parameters such as image type document size and Fro
173. er names and numbers For example when you set up your machine you enter your name or your Key Assigned numbers letters or characters company s name and the fax number When you store fax numbers or email 1 1 addresses in memory you may also enter the corresponding names 2 ABCabc2 3 DEFdef3 Understanding keypad 4 GHIghi4 5 J JKLjkI5 Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 labeled with MNO Each time you press 6 the display 6 MNOmno6 shows a different letter M N O m n o and finally 6 7 PORSpars7 8 TUVtuv8 KA e You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice 9 WXYZwxyz9 e To delete the last digit or character press the arrows button e Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its 0 amp 0 options or the models x HA _ L S T o marollowKeyvalues magnokappesragpansing onte a These symbols are available when you type for network authentication are doing lt gt P Aag Kani These symbols are available when you type for network authentication GHI JKL MNO 4 Special Features 261 Entering various characters a CI Deletes character in the input area Understanding pop up keyboard ES Moves the cursor between characters in the input area 7 Saves and closes input result This feature is only available for models with a touch screen ok p e Some of
174. er s network information is as shown follows IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Then the machine s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 201 Wireless network setup Access point via USB cable recommended 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop e ForMacOSX 10 8 double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Double click the MAC Installer folder 5 Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Click Agree to agree to the license agreement CON AO WU A Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install 9 Enter the password and click OK 1 0 Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue O Printer Connection Type Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network USB Connected Printer g Connect the printer to this computer using a USS cable Network Conneted Printer Wired or Wireless aa Connect the printer to the same network as this computer If you want to chang
175. er until it is clean and dry Scanner lid Scanner glass Document feeder glass White bar hWN 4 Close the scanner lid 3 Maintenance 112 I Tips for moving amp storing your machine When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely 3 Maintenance 113 4 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error Tips for avoiding paper jams 115 Clearing jams 116 Understanding the status LED 134 Understanding display messages 137 WA This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error If your machine has a display screen check the message on the display screen first to solve the error If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the Advanced Guide see Troubleshooting on page 336 If you cannot find a solution in the User s Guide or the problem persists call for service i Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct medias most paper jams can be avoided To avoid paper jams refer to the following guidelines Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Tray overview on page 47 Do not remove paper from the tray while your
176. erial resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal The United States of America only Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 State of California Proposition 65 Warning USA Only The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California to publish a list of chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity and requires businesses to warn of potential exposure to such chemicals WARNING This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer birth defects or other reproductive harm This appliance can cause low level exposure to the chemicals which can be minimized by operating the appliance in a well ventilated area at IS H a KEAN SR RT ILE BS BE HY Fe MAAM BA E Be ER FB th 5 Appendix 154 Regulatory information Radio frequency emissions FCC information to the user This de
177. erience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine 5 Appendix 158 Regulatory information If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should
178. es When you finish select No for this option You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through server or USB memory device If the server or the USB memory device already has the same name you enter you can change the name cancel the job or overwrite it e Rename The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite Overwrites the existing the file Item Description ren Destination Enter the destination s information The scan options can be set to those most frequentl Change Default P q y used Original Size Sets the image size Original Type Sets the original document s type Resolution Sets the image resolution Duplex You can select the color options of scan outputs e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel Color Mode e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel File Policy Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan File Name Makes a file name to store the scan data 3 Useful Setting Menus 236 Scan Item Server Confirmation Description You can set the machine to print server confirmation result report Q f you select On Error the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful Item Digital Signature in PDF Descri
179. es a message the answering machine stores the message If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax KA A If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings e Ifthe answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring e Ifthe machine is in Tel mode disconnect or switch off the answering machine with the fax machine Otherwise the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation Receiving faxes with an extension telephone When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket you can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax 9 js the remote receive code preset at the factory The first and the last asterisks are fixed but you can change the middle number to whatever you want WA While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket copy and scan features are not available Receiving faxes using DRPD mode This setting may not be available depending on your country Distinct
180. esentatives to obtain the list of available supplies and maintenance parts See Available consumables on page 90 e See Available accessories on page 91 To order Samsung authorized supplies accessories and maintenance parts contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine You can also visit www samsung com supplies and then select your country region to obtain the contact information for service 3 Maintenance 8o Available consumables When supplies reach the end of their life spans you can order the followings of supplies for your machine Type Average yield Part name Approx 3 000 pages e M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series MLT D203S e M3375 M3875 M4075 series MLT D204S Approx 5 000 pages e M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series MLT D203L Toner cartridge e M3375 M3875 M4075 series MLT D204L Approx 10 000 pages e M3870 M4070 M4072 series MLT D203E e M3875 M4075 series MLT D204E Approx 15 000 pages e M4070 M4072 series MLT D203U e M4075 series MLT D204U Approx 30 000 pages e M3375 M3875 M4075 series MLT R204 Imaging unit Based on 3 average letter A4 size pages for print job a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval graphics media type and media size 2 Depending on the options percentage of image area and job mode used the toner cartridge s lifes
181. example of using the Chrome browser l i Run Chrome Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet Open the document or email that you want to print Click the wrench icon Sin the browser s top right corner Printing from an application on mobile device The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Select Print with Google Cloud Print Android mobile phone 1 2 3 4 Click Print A new tab for printing appears 5 6 Click the Print button 1 Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device 2 If you do not have the application download it from the application store such as Android Market or App Store 2 Using a Network Connected Machine gg 3 Useful Setting Menus This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for advanced machine setup Before you begin reading a chapter Print Copy Fax Scan System setup Network setup Job management Job Status Eco USB Document box Scan to cloud Secure release Before you begin reading a chapter This chapter explains all the features available for this series models to help users easily understand the features You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide see Menu overview on page 32 The following are tips for using this chapter Thecontrol panel provide
182. fied Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers Classes Rotresh Add Printer Remove Printer Stop Test Properties Selected printer Local printer idie Model URI 1 Printer Configuration 2 Port Configuration 5 Useful Management Tools 332 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Printers tab KA To use the on screen help the Help or button from the window View the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes Printers configuration Printers Classos Selected printer Local printer idie 1 Switches to Printers configuration 2 Shows all of the installed machines 3 Shows the status model name and URI of your machine 5 Useful Management Tools 333 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The printer control buttons are as follows Refresh Renews the available machines list Add Printer Allows you to add a new machine Remove Printer Removes the selected machine Set as Default Sets the current selected machine as a default machine Stop Start Stops starts the machine Test Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is workin
183. g It was included in the original Mac 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allowa third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is acommonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After t
184. g properly Properties Allows you to view and change the printer s properties Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes Printers configuration e Printers Classes am 7 Refresh Ss Add Class Remove Ciass id Set as Detauit 2 ps class State idle Printers In class Exit 1 Shows all of the machine classes 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class Refresh Renews the classes list Add Class Allows you to add a new machine class Remove Class Removes the selected machine class 5 Useful Management Tools 334 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Ports configuration 1 Switches to Ports configuration 2 Shows all of the available ports In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each 3 Shows the port type device connected to the port and status port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason Refresh Renews the available ports list IE e Release port Releases the selected port 2 Patna Eco NG BG _ BENT evimtps evimips idevmip7 Help ea ea a L MevimtpS Aovimtp Movimip10 Mowmiptt 3 setected port Port typo USB Device Port is unused 5 Useful Management Tools 335 6 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error
185. g is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document for the current copy job 1 Select G O copy gt C4 Menu gt Copy Feature gt Original Type on the control panel Or Sopa CB Menu gt Copy Feature gt Original Type on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Copy gt settings gt Original Type on the touch screen Option Select the option you want For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows Text Use for originals containing mostly text Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs If texts in the printout is blurry select Text to get the clear texts Photo Use when the originals are photographs Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying 4 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home A icon to return to ready mode Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 from the document feeder or scanner glass 4 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 If the machine set to Eco mode reduce and enlarge features are not available To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Select copy gt Ci Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge on the control pan
186. gement Image Mar Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color registration color density etc Imaging Unit Low Alert Customizes the toner low or toner empty alert for imaging unit Print Setup Customizes the print job Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 e You need to enter a password to enter this menu The default password is sec00000 For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Admin Setup gt Next on the touch screen 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup paaa Item Description Item Description P Change Admin Changes the machine s password for accessing the Admin Controls user access to a machine You can assign different Ko Password Setup levels of permissions to use the machine to each user Firmware Upgrades to the latest firmware Turn this option On and Upgrade then download the firmware file 9 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Cee eens Web Service Open the Web browser from your You can select the method for overwriting the secure non Control networked computer and type the IP address of your volatile memory machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Custom Select to determine the number of times the the Security tab gt User Access Control see memory will be overwritten The hard
187. glish KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 GSM 7799 www samsung com KENYA 0800 545 545 www samsung com 183 2255 183 CALL www samsung com ae English KUWAIT www samsung com ae_ar Arabic KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung com LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com lv LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com lIt LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 www samsung com my MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com MOLDOVA 0 800 614 40 www samsung com MONGOLIA 7 800 555 55 55 www samsung com MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www samsung com MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite MOZAMBIQUE 847267864 827267864 www samsung com PARAGUAY 009 800 542 0001 www samsung com py NAMIBIA 08 197 267 864 www samsung com 0 800 777 08 www samsung com pe 0800 726 7864 www samsung com PERU Desde celulares por favor llamar SEE sieaa al n mero 336 8686 ere 0900 SAMSUNG 0900 7267864 www samsung com 1 800 10 7267864 PLDT www samsung com ph 0 10 min 1 800 8 7267864 Globe landline PHILIPPINES and Mobile NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 786 gt www samsung com nz 02 4222111 Other landline 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com RIN latin Spanish 0 801 1SAMSUNG 1 72 678 www samsung com pl NICARAGUA latin_en English HHP 0 801 672
188. h less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition should not be wrinkled nicked nor damaged Temperature should resist the heat and pressure of the machine during operation e Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds e Do not use stamped envelopes e Donot use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup ET Media and tray Transparency To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers e Must withstand the machine s fusing temperature e Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine e Donot leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing e Toavoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully e To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight e Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges e Donot use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet e To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are being printed out Labels To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser printers When selecting labels consider the following fact
189. hange the toner cartridge appears You can set the option for whether or not this message or LED appears e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models e You can set the machine s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt gt Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Device Settings on page 323 1 Select Menu gt System Setup gt Maintenance gt Toner Low Alert on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select iG Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup gt Toner Status Alert on the touch screen 2 Select the option you want 3 Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection 4 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode 3 Maintenance 106 Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing condition and use your machine longer A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvents or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet If your machine o
190. he Plain paper section 106 to 120 g m 28 to 32 106 to 120 g m 28 to 32 106to 120 g m 28 to 32 Ibs paper section lbs bond lbs bond bond Minimum size custom f gt Multi purpose or manual Multi purpose or manual feeder tray 60 to 220 g m 16 to 58 Ibs bond feeder tray 76 x 127 mm 2 99 x 5 inches Tray 1 Tray 2 60 to 163 g m 16 to 43 Ibs bond e Tray 1 Tray 2 105 x 148 5 mm 4 13 x 5 85 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches a Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions b M337x series only c 1 sheet for manual feeder d The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 sheffield This means the numeric level of smoothness e The paper types available in multi purpose tray Plan Thick Thicker Thin Cotton Colored Pre printed Recycled Envelope Transparency Labels Cardstock Bond Archive f The paper types available in tray 1 Plan Thick Thin Recycled Cardstock Bond Archive 5 Appendix Specifications System requirements Microsoft Windows Operan y e Requirement recommended CPU RAM free HDD space Windows XP Intel Pentium IIl 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 256 MB 1 5 GB Windows Server 2003 Intel Pentium Ill 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 512 MB 1 25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz Pentium IV 2 GHz 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Wind
191. he command line parameter in the command item The machine does not print It isa known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and has been whole pages and output is reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download printed on half the page the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem I cannot scan via Gimp Front Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your end computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detailed information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use another kind of scan application refer to application s Help Cannot open port device file Avoid changing print job parameters e q via LPR GUI while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print error message appears when job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port printing a document while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs If this situation occurs
192. he printer detects the printing data from computer Skip Blank Pages whether a page is empty or not You can set to print or skip the blank page Auto CR Allows you to append the required carriage return to each line feed which is useful for Unix or DOS users Sets the emulation type and option e Emulation Type The machine language defines how Emulation the computer communicates with the machine Setup Sets the detailed settings for the selected emulation type 3 Useful Setting Menus 221 Item Description Copy feature Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image see Reduced or enlarged copy on page 72 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on Reduce Enlarge If the machine is set to Eco mode reduce and page 32 enlarge features are not available To change the menu options S Copy quickly with basic copy settings Copies can be Basic Copy f f customized through detailed options e Press copy gt 3 Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel Custom Copy Customized the settings for a current copy job Or 8 Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel py j Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image to Auto Fit C Sho OPy fit on the paper currently loaded in the machine e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt
193. he same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Overlay Creating a new page overlay To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences Click the Advanced tab and select Edit from the Overlay drop down list Edit Overlay window appears In the Edit Overlay window click Create In the Save As window type a name up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C FormOver aa TY m Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description a Click the Advanced tab b Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop down list If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Open window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Using a page overlay Overlay List box d Ifnecessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to
194. his user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 3 Maintenance 108 J Cleaning the machine M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series _ M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series 3 Maintenance J Cleaning the machine Cleaning the pickup roller Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before 4 cleaning the machine e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 3 Maintenance 110 J Cleaning the machine Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 2 e Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Lift and open the scanner lid 3 Maintenance aa Cleaning the machine 3 Wipe the surface of the scann
195. ick the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings 2 Select Remove Printer 3 Select the printer you want to delete 4 Click Yes You can see that the selected printer is removed from the screen Printing from Windows 8 This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen Basic printing 1 Open the document to print 2 From the Charms select Devices 3 Select your printer from the list 5 Useful Management Tools 1328 Using Samsung Printer Experience Cancelling a print job Basic tab If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as Samsung Printer Experience follows You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon B in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing Cancel or Stop Clear button on the control panel Opening more settings Basic The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or eee f options This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies orientation and document type You can set up more printing parameters Eco settings This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media 1 Open the document you want to print 2 From the Charms select Devices 3 Select your printer from the list 4 Click More settings 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using Samsung Print
196. iew Turning on the machine Installing the driver locally Reinstalling the driver Key benefits Environmentally friendly Per To save toner and paper this machine supports Eco feature see Eco printing on page 66 To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper see Using advanced print features on page 270 To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing see Using advanced print features on page 270 To save electricity this machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy Fast high resolution printing EN o You can print with a resolution of up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi effective output 1 200 x 600 x 2 bit Fast on demand printing M337x series For single side printing up to 33 ppm A4 or up to 35 ppm Letter M387x series For single side printing up to 38 ppm A4 or up to 40 ppm Letter M407x series For single side printing up to 40 ppm A4 or up to 42 ppm Letter Convenience You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google Cloud Print enabled apps see Google Cloud Print on page 217 Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard see Easy Capture Manager on page 313 Key benefits Samsung Easy Pri
197. ile to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options K It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced 6 Troubleshooting 341 Printing problems Condition Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Possible cause Using damp wet paper can cause vapor white smoke during printing Suggested solutions This is not a problem just keep printing If you are bothered by the smoke vapor then replace the paper with fresh paper from an unopened ream The machine does not print special sized paper such as billing paper Paper size and paper size setting do not match Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 64 The printed billing paper is curled The paper type setting does not match Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to Thin see Opening printing preferences on page 64 6 Troubleshooting 342 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly there might be a reduction in print quality See the table bel
198. in another phone The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly To check that print an address book list The original does not feed into the machine Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Faxes are not received automatically The receiving mode should be set to fax see Changing the receive modes on page 303 e Make sure that there is paper in the tray see Print media specifications on page 146 e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem The machine does not send Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e Atoner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 6 Troubleshooting 354 Faxing problems Condition Some of the words on a
199. inal Type diad a ae ilahisi Text Photo off Text FageFraze Ri ika ae Photo On Text Photo on a Original Size Print Small Original Dark 1 Dark 5 Photo gina Duplex Cancel Job Hole Punch 1 Sided Book Center 2 Sided Border Erase 2 Sided Rotated a Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine b This option does not appear when the 2 Up 4 Up Book copy Duplex Auto Fit option is on or the original document is loaded in ADF DADF c This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy d This option appears only when the Item option is On e This option appears only when the Message option is On 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 33 Menu overview ax Setup see Sending setup on page 229 Receiving setup on page 231 Sending Redial Times Redial Term Prefix Dial ECM Mode Fax Confirmation Image TCR Dial Mode Toll Save Receiving Receive Mode Fax Tel Ans Fax DRPD Mode Ring to Answer Stamp Rcv Name Rcv Start Code Auto Reduction Discard Size Junk Fax Setup DRPD Mode Duplex Print Change Default Darkness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex Manual TX RX Scan Feature see Scan feature on page 234 USB Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Email Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode
200. iness entity or individual 5 Appendix Regulatory information The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the tele
201. ing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 Open the document to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Print Setup for some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation and make sure that your machine is selected Click Apply Open the File menu and click Print Select your machine to print Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print Change other printing options in each tab if necessary Click Print Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the Ipr printing system or other applications for odd even printing see Features by models on page 8 aj o Na yuk You can print text image pdf files on your machine using the standard CUPS directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ip or lpr utility allows you to do that You can print these files by using below command format Ip d lt printer names o lt option gt lt file name gt Please refer to Ip or lpr man page on your system for more details Configuring Printer Properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 1 Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration 2 Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties 4 Special Features 282 Prin
202. ing the printer driver only basic printing features are available e Ifyou want to check the machine s status or set the settings connect the machine to a computer with a USB cable or a network e Ifyou use the IEEE 1284B parallel connector you can not use the USB cable a Plain paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond b To use the optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector plug it to the UBS port and the 5V output port 3 Maintenance EI Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature An environment with salty air and humidity Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to ensure optimal performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Handling instructions Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions The toner Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation if original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage e Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically short
203. int on the touch screen Go to step 6 5 Press OK when Yes appears to print another job and repeat from step 2 Otherwise press the arrows to select No and press OK 6 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home AD icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 8a Using USB memory device EE Chive mel ee ELLE Data in the machine s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them as backup files on a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine Select 3 Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Export Setting 2 on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Setup 5 Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup gt Export Setting on the touch screen Select Setup Data or Address Book Select the file you want to back up Press OK or Yes when the confimation window appears Aa uu ff W Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home A icon to return to ready mode Restoring data Ana UA W Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port Select 43 Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Import Setting on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup gt Import Setting on the touch s
204. ion Ring Volume Adjusts the ring volume You can select different levels e Supplies Info e Supplies Information Prints supplies information page Address Book Prints all of the addresses currently stored in the machine s memory Demo Page Prints the demo page to check whether your machine is printing properly or not 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup Item Help List Description Prints the help page to check whether your machine is printing properly or not Item Usage Counter Description Prints a usage page The usage page contains the total number of pages printed Fax Send Confirmation Prints fax confirmation result Fax Options Prints the information of a fax report Faxseni Prints information on the faxes you have recently Junk Fax Prints the junk fax numbers sent This is only available when Job Accounting is 3 Prints information on the faxes you have recently enabled from the SyncThru Web Admin Fax Received Account received Email Sent Prints information on the emails you have recently sent e Fax Scheduled Jobs e Fax Schedule Jobs Prints the document list currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation Network Configuration Prints information on your machine s network connection and configuration PCL Font List Prints the PCL font list PS Font Li
205. is done click Finish Add a network printer CON A WU Bb W N Double click the Unified Driver Configurator Click Add Printer The Add printer wizard window opens Click Next Select Network printer and click the Search button The printer s IP address and model name appears on list field Select your machine and click Next Enter the printer description and click Next After the machine is added click Finish Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before Ky installing the UNIX printer driver see Operating System on page 8 The commands are marked with when typing the commands do not type e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Operating System on page 8 To use the UNIX printer driver you have to install the UNIX printer driver package first then setup the printer You can download the UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Installing the UNIX printer driver package The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned 1 From the Samsung website download and unpack the UNIX Printer Driver package to your computer 2 Acquire root privileges su 3 Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 184 Installing driver over the
206. is telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Canada only This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five L indice d equivalence de la sonnerie IES sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs a la seule condition que la somme d indices d equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n excede pas cinq Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business bus
207. it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 3 Maintenance 94 j Redistributing toner M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series 3 Maintenance os j Redistributing toner M3375 M3875 M4075 series 3 Maintenance 96 Replacing the toner cartridge A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life e The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicate when the toner cartridge should be replaced e The computer s Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you cartridge is empty on toner see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 324 Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine see Available consumables on page 90 KA e Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly it will increase the initial print quality e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 A To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary e Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package They might scratch the drum of the cartridge e If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a
208. ition The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete Possible cause The machine cable is loose or defective Suggested solutions Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job Finally try a new machine cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge e See Redistributing toner on page 94 e See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the f
209. ive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone 4 Special Features 304 i Fax features D KA This setting may not be available depending on your country Select pi fax 5 Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving gt Receive Mode gt DRPD on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Receive Mode gt DRPD on the touch screen Call your fax number from another telephone When your machine begins to ring do not answer the call The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern The machine displays Waiting Ring while recording ring pattern when completed learning the display shows Completed DRPD Setup Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2 DRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number or connect the machine to another telephone line e After DRPD has been set up call your fax number again to verify that the machine answers with a fax tone Then have a call placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket Receiving in s
210. k Agree to agree to the license agreement 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wired network setup 8 11 12 13 14 Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install Enter the password and click OK When the message that warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue Select Network Connected Printer Wired or Wireless on the Printer Connection Type and click Set IP Address button Click the g iconin the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all the settings are correct IPv4 configuration using SetIP Linux Before using the SetIP program disable the computer firewall from System Preferences or Administrator A W N a The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems Open opt Samsung mfp share utils Doub
211. k the IP address by printing the network configuration report e Check whether the access point or wireless router has a configured security password If it has a password refer to the access point or wireless Other problems router administrator If problems occur while using the machine on a network check the following e Check the machine s IP address Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network Due to the characteristics of DHCP the allocated IP address could change if the For information on the access point or wireless router refer to its own machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset user s guide 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 213 Wireless network setup Register the product s MAC address when you configure the DHCP server on the access point or wireless router Then you can always use the IP address that is set with the MAC address You can identify the MAC address of your machine by printing a network configuration report see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 e Check the wireless environment You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user s information before connecting to the access point or wireless router e This machine only supports IEEE 802 11 b g n and Wi Fi Other wireless communication types e g Bluetooth are not support
212. ks a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears Click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID name you want SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select ad hoc e Channel Select the channel Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Password Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security enabled Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next e WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key The window showing the wireless network setting appears Check the settings and click Next 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 200 Wireless network setup 9 The Wireless Network Setting Complete
213. l stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear es e The toner cartridge may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it ee oe ed The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on AaBDL page 97 AaBb GC AaB be If the problem persists the machine may require repairing Contact a service representative AaRha NAD YY 6 Troubleshooting 349 Printing quality problems Condition Curl AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc GE Suggested solutions If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer s paper option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set type to Thin see Opening printing preferences on page 64 An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets Loose toner Light print or contamination occurs Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging Change the altitude setting for your machine see Altitude adjustment on page 258 6 Troubleshooting 350 Copying problems Condition Suggested solutions Copies are too light or too dark Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrou
214. le click the SetIPApplet html file Click to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Installing driver over the network KA e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8 e The machine that does not support the network interface it will not be able to use this feature see Rear view on page 22 e You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive For windows select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Installing driver over the network window Then click Next Windows SSO O O 4 Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set see Setting IP 5 address on p
215. le depending on your country see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 304 3 Useful Setting Menus 231 Fax Item Duplex Print Description Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper You can save the paper usage Off Prints only one side of the paper e Long Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the long edge e Short Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the short edge Manual TX RX This option allows users to select sending receiveing fax manually using the Qon Hook Dial button extension telephone or a handset Change Default setup K Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or Models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Press d fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Change Default on the control panel Item Description The fax options can be set to those most frequently used Change Default 3 Useful Setting Menus 232 Fax Manual TX RX setup KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Press 45 fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Manual TX RX on the control panel For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup
216. le document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format Glossary Index A accessories installing 101 ordering 91 address book editing 264 general setup 247 group editing 265 group registering 264 registering 263 using 263 address book setup 263 administrator s setup 241 AirPrint 216 AnyWeb Print 314 authorized users registering 268 B buttons Darkness 23 eco 24 id copy 23 24 numeric keypad 24 25 reduce enlarge 24 scan to 24 WPS 23 C cleaning inside 108 outside 107 pickup roller 110 scan unit 111 cleaning a machine 107 clear button 25 control panel 23 touch screen 37 convention 14 copy general setup 222 copying basic copying 70 reducing or enlarging copies 72 D default settings tray setting 57 device options 101 direct printing utility 279 document box 254 general setup 254 driver installation Unix 184 E easy document creator 320 e book conversion 320 Eco 252 eco printing 66 email address 259 searching 259 storing 259 entering character 261 error message 137 F favorites settings for printing 65 fax automatic redialing 297 canceling a reserved fax job 299 changing the receive modes 303 Index i Index delaying a fax transmission 298 forwarding a received fax to another destination 301 forwarding a sent fax to another destination 300 general setup
217. ling driver over the network on page 178 See your network administrator or the person that set up your wireless network for information about your network configuration Items to prepare Access point Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface Network cable Printing a network configuration report You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report See Printing a network configuration report on page 175 IP setting using SetIP Program Windows This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report See Setting IP address on page 175 Configuring the machine s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point or wireless router was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who set up your network To configure wireless parameters you can use SyncThru Web Service Using SyncThru Web Service Before starting wireless parameter configuration check the cable connection status
218. ly If you make a group 1 Click Address Book gt Group gt Add Group 2 Select the Speed No and enter Group Name You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual s after this group is created 3 Click Apply Searching for an email address Searching sequentially through memory Select Iscan gt Address Book gt Search amp Send gt Select an address group gt All on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select g Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Email gt View List gt Individual or Group on the touch screen Search through the entire memory in index numerical order and select the name and address you want 4 Special Features 259 Storing email address Searching with a particular first letter 1 Select scan gt Address Book gt Search amp Send gt Select an address group gt ID on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select g Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Email gt View Lists gt Individual or Group on the touch screen 2 Enter the first few letters of the name you want For the model with a touch screen press E options gt Search gt enter the first few letters of the name you want 3 Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears 4 Special Features 260 Entering various characters As you perform various tasks you may need to ent
219. m the Charms select Share 5 Samsung Printer Experience resolution Select the printer settings such as the number of copies and orientation 5 Click Prescan la to check the image Click the Print button to start the print job A W N 6 Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as rotate and mirror Scanning from Windows 8 7 Click Scan Eana save the image K e When you place the originals in the ADF or DADF Prescan Ka is not 2 This section is for the users with multi functional printers Ea available You can skip step 5 if the Prescan option is selected Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer 5 Useful Management Tools 1331 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator see Installation for Linux on page 171 Opening Unified Driver Configurator After the driver is installed on your Linux system the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop icon will automatically be created on your desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver gt Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window Uni
220. machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix papers in a tray Use only recommended print media see Print media specifications on page 146 4 Troubleshooting 115 Clearing jams KA To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently In tray x wo Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 Troubleshooting KO Clearing jams In optional tray S i Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 2 e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 4 Troubleshooting ing jams Clear If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting Clearing jams In the multi purpose or manual feeder tray M337x series 4 Troubleshooting 119 Clearing jams M387x M407 x series ES KO IZZA AA Click this link to open an animation about
221. media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often 3 Maintenance Ee j Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs and or density variation side to side e The Status LED blinks red The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the display e The computer s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which cartridge is low on toner see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 324 If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner KU Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 A e To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary e Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package They might scratch the drum of the cartridge If toner gets on your clothing wipe
222. ments in the installation window Then click Next 1 Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine 2 Turn on your computer access point and machine 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 199 Wireless network setup 5 Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next 1 Welcome 2 Connecting Printers Printer Connection Type AA Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network 4 Installation 5 Finish USB connection Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable Network connection Connect the printer to the same network as this computer If your printer is already connected to the network the installer will detect the printer Wireless network connection e Big g Connect the printer to the same wireless network as this computer If your printer is not connected to the wireless network the installer will help you set up the wireless network This is only available for printers that support wireless networking E select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer a i k d 6 On the Are you setting up your printer for the first time screen select Yes will set up my printer s wireless network Then click Next If your printer is already connected on the network select No my printer is already connected to my network 7 After searching the wireless networ
223. models that have the 4 WPS button on the control panel press and hold the 8 WPS button on the control panel for more than 4 seconds Press PIN or Connect via PIN Press OK when the confirmation window appears The eight digit PIN appears on the display You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point or wireless router The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below Connecting The machine is connecting to the wireless network Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on c SSID Type After completing the wireless network connection process the AP s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 193 Wireless network setup 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network Machines without a display screen Connecting in PBC mode 1 Press and hold the O WPS button on the control panel for about 2 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly The machine starts connecting to the wireless network The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the access point or wireless router Press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED The machine is c
224. mp 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com SENEGAL TOBAGO africa_fr SERBIA 011 321 6899 www samsung com rs TURKEY kas ANS SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com sg baba SUD SPUN 17207864 PAANAN SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 786 www samsung com sas Des onMeUNG 720706 UNANSAMAUNG COM SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com van a 20 72 at AN SARUN SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172678 www samsung com Han MABLEBEE YEA RERE 1 aUe Mobile Phones SUDAN 1969 www samsung com UGANDA 0800 300 300 www samsung com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 SAMSUNG www samsung com 7 i Hi 7 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide gg Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite 0 800 502 000 www samsung com ua Ukrainian UKRAINE www samsung com ua_ru Russian URUGUAY 000 405 437 33 www samsung com UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com ve VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com ZAMBIA 0211 350370 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 366 Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 11b g n 802 11b g n can share same
225. n incoming fax are stretched Suggested solutions The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it see Cleaning the scan unit on page 111 The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Soeak with the other machine operator and ask them to solve the problem on their side Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display indicating the memory status shows delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Call for service Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting Check the paper size and type again 6 Troubleshooting 355 Operating system problems Common Windows problems Condition Suggested solutions File in Use message appears Exit all software applications Remove all software from the startup group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver during installation General Protection Fault Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Exception OE Spool 32 or Illegal Operation messages
226. n the printed paper Toner can be fused by a combination of heat pressure from the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper Glossary Glossary TWAIN Watermark An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other g
227. nager KA To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotated load the originals on the DADF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List Select Fax to PC Settings menu A W N 3 Press OK to save the selection Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings For the model with a touch screen press back to save the Image Type Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF selection Save Location Select location to save the converted faxes e Prefix Select prefix e Print received fax Set to print information for the received fax after receiving the fax 4 Special Features 302 l Fax features 5 Changing the receive modes 1 Notify me when complete Set to show the popup window to notify receiving a fax Open with default application After receiving the fax open it with default application None After receiving a fax the machine does not notify the user or opens the application Press Save gt OK Press d fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving gt Receive Mode on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Receive Mode on the touch screen Select the option you want Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode Tel Receives a fax by pressing
228. nces window that appears in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine in use e When you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning mark amp or 4 An 4 mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and an amp mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment Open the document you want to print Select Print from the file menu The Print window appears Select your machine from the Select Printer Click Properties or Preferences 2 The screenshot may differ depending on model a A _ Printing Preferences Favorites Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Eco Samsung apa Preview 4 Detais lM Last Used Setting Letter Omm This favorite enables you to print with last used 8 50 x 11 00 inches inch ka settings Normal Printing a This favorite enables you to print with all factory default settings A i ng Eco Preview Printing This favorite enables you to see a print preview and save toner fpaper by adjusting print options S Double Sided Printing 4 This favorite enables you to save paper by printing on double sides of a sheet ic 2 in 1 Printing j This favorite enables you to save paper by printing 2 pages on one side of a sheet FA a e Booklet Printing This favorite enables you to lay out a document as a booklet format E ci Secure
229. nd try the printing job again If the problem persists call a service representative When you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the model or optional goods error number indicates the error number tray type indicates the tray number media type indicates the media type media size indicates the media size unit type indicates the unit type Paper Jam related messages Message e Original paper jam inside of scanner Remove jam Meaning The loaded original document has jammed in document feeder Suggested solutions Clear the jam see Clearing original document jams on page 128 Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed in the tray Clear the jam see In tray1 on page 116 Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed in the optional tray Clear the jam see In optional tray on page 117 Paper Jam in MP tray Paper has jammed in the multi purpose tray Clear the jam see In the multi purpose or manual feeder tray on page 119 Jam inside machine Paper has jammed in inside the machine Clear the jam see Inside the machine on page 121 e Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed in inside the duplex Clear the jam see In the duplex unit area on page 126 Jamin exit area Paper has jammed in the paper e
230. nds of copies see Changing the settings for each copy on page 70 Smears lines marks or spots Ifthe defects are on the original adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies appear on copies If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit see Cleaning the scan unit on page 111 Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide e The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Image rubs off the copy easily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams e Fan the paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if occur necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight see Print media specifications on page 146 e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Toner cartridge produces fewer Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newslet
231. ne malfunction and environmental pollution The warranty does not cover damages caused by a user s carelessness When toner gets on your clothing do not use hot water to wash it Hot water sets toner into fabric Use cold water Do not burn any of the consumables such as toner cartridge or fuser unit This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested 1 Introduction 19 Machine overview The actual component may differ from the illustration below Some components may change depending on the circumstances Machine Power cord Quick installation guide LYS KO IN A Software CD Card reader holder Handset gt Misc accessories a The software CD contains the print drivers user s guide and software applications b M407xFX only c Handset model only see Various features on page 10 d Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model 1 Introduction EJ Machine overview This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model There are various types of machine e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8
232. ne supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 anda sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector 5 A D lt X Use only a metal shielded USB memory device Wr O UY Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification otherwise the machine might not recognize it 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Using USB memory device You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory A e Donotremove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation device or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user s misuse e If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see the user s guide of the USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device 2 e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 or Control panel overview on page 23 e lt may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59
233. ness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex Speed Dial Send To WET Option settings Darkness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex Group Dial Send To WET Option settings Darkness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex Redial To WEN Option settings Darkness Resolution Color Mode Original Type Original Size Duplex 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Lao Menu overview Machine Setup Default Setting Copy Default Scan Default Fax Default Scan to Cloud Default Program Management Paper Setup Tray1 Tray2 MP Tray Margin Tray Behavior Auto Tray Switch Paper Substitution Auto Continue Tray Protection Address Book Phone Book Email Print Delete All a This is an optional feature b This is only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru Web Admin Service O setup see System setup on page 238 Reports Configuration Demo Page Help List Network Configuration Supplies Information Usage Counter Account Fax Received Fax Sent Fax Schedule Jobs Fax Send Confirmation Junk Fax Email Sent PCL Font PS Font EPSON Font Address Book Fax Setup Send Forward Receive Forward Toll Save Junk Fax Setup Secure Receive Prefix Dial Stamp Received Name ECM Mode Modem Speed Dial Mode Ring to Answer Receive Mode Manual TX RX Redial Term Redial Times c Some menus may not appear on the
234. network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point or wireless router was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who set up your network 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 195 Wireless network setup KA After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a machine driver to print from an application see Installing driver over the network on page 178 1 Press the Menu gt Network gt Wireless gt WLAN Settings button on the control panel 2 Press the OK to select the setup method you want Wizard recommended In this mode the setup is automatic The machine will display a list of available networks from which to choose After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the corresponding security key Custom In this mode users can give or edit manually their own SSID or choose the security option in detail Setup using Windows 2 Shortcut to the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD If you have installed the printer driver once you can access the Samsung Easy Wireless Setup program without the CD see Accessing management tools on page 312 Access point via USB cable recommended Items to prepare Access point Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable Creating the infrastr
235. ng on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options y Press NG Eco 5 select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item Description Eco On View current eco mode and change on off option Eco Off Sets eco related settings and change default settings e Default Mode Select this to turn on or off the Settings default mode Feature Configuration Select the Default mode or Custom mode 3 Useful Setting Menus 252 USB Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine and then press USB e Press USB gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item Description e USB Print Select a file to print Print From Scan to USB Scan the document to the USB device File Manage Select a file to delete You can format the USB device Show Space Shows the remaining space 3 Useful Setting Menus 253 Document box Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 Press Document Box gt select the menu item you want gt Next on the touch screen Item Description System Boxes Saves
236. nk must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers e Before you load preprinted paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality e In the software application set the margins to at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup E3 Media and tray 3 Press OK to save the selection Setting the paper size and type For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a paper mismatch error 4 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Cy icon to return to ready mode To change the paper setting set in the machine from the Samsung Easy Printer Manager select 7 Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings WU If you want to use special sized paper such as billing paper select the Paper Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen you can set it from tab gt Size gt Edit and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the Printing the control panel Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 64 Then set the paper type from the Printing preferences window gt Paper tab gt Paper Type see Opening printing preferences on page 64 LA It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models
237. nsport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and laser printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format Glossary Glossary PostScript Protocol PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system call
238. nter Manager and Printing Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine s status and allows you to customize the machine s settings see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 324 or Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager on page 321 Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax see Using Samsung Easy Document Creator on page 320 AnyWeb Print helps you screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program see Samsung AnyWeb Print on page 314 Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the latest version during the printer driver installation process This is available only for Windows If you have Internet access you can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Wide range of functionality and application support e Supports various paper sizes see Print media specifications on page 146 e Print watermark You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential see Using advanced print features on page 270 You can print in various operating systems see System requirements on page 148 e
239. nterval media type and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is turns on and the printer stops printing All Tray Empty Paper is empty in all tray Load paper There is no paper in all tray Load paper in tray see Loading paper in the tray on page 49 Paper Empty in tray 1 Paper is empty in tray 1 Load paper Paper Empty in tray 2 Paper is empty in tray 2 Load paper There is no paper in tray Load paper in tray see Tray 1 optional tray on page 49 4 Troubleshooting 139 Understanding display messages Message Paper Empty in MP Paper is empty in MP tray Load paper Meaning There is no paperin the multi purpose tray Suggested solutions Load paper in the multi purpose tray see Multi purpose or manual feeder tray on page 50 Network related messages Tray 2 door is open Close it The tray2 is not securely latched Close the tray2 until it locks into place Message Door is open Meaning The front cover or rear Misc messages Suggested solutions Close the cover until it Close it cover is not securely locks into place latched Scanner door open The document feeder Close the cover until it Door of scanner is cover is not securely locks into place open latched Close the door Not Proper room temp Not Proper room temperature Change room temperature The machine is in a room
240. nting replace the imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 100 Toner Not Install it IMG Not The imaging unit Installa Samsung genuine imaging Compatible you have installed is unit designed for your machine Imaging unit is not not for your compatible machine Check guide compatible IMG Not Installed Imaging unit is not installed Install the unit The imaging unit is not installed Reinstall the imaging unit two or three times If the problem persists call for service Toner cartridge is not compatible Check guide Prepare IMG unit Prepare new imaging unit The estimated imaging unit life is close Prepare a new imaging unit for replacement see Available consumables on page 90 The indicated toner cartridge is not suitable for your machine Install the corresponding toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 4 Troubleshooting 138 j Understanding display messages Message Prepare new toner Prepare new toner cartridge Meaning Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Suggested solutions Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 94 e Replace new toner Replace with new toner cartridge
241. ntout Always keep it clean see Cleaning the scan unit on page 111 e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the scanner lid open A e Be careful not to break the scanner glass You may get hurt e Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt e Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes In the document feeder Using the document feeder or duplex automatic document feeder DADF you can load up to 50 sheets of paper 80 g m 21 Ibs bond for one job 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 60 Media and tray Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before 3 Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size loading originals Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray KU Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean see Cleaning the scan unit on page 111 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Basic printing 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list KU For special printing features refer to the A
242. o operate the equipment Canadian radio interference regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada 5 Appendix 155 Regulatory information United States of America Federal Communications Commission FCC Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power Radio LAN devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm 8 inches separation between the device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on The po
243. oes not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov For ENERGY STAR certified models the ENRGY STAR label will be on your machine Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an AO environmentally responsible manner China only Power saver IE KAN FS FS WT ARP ABE RAT CAI BI mE T BIO IIA RE RATS NGA fab TC EK E IH r ot IT Ro ESR IME TEE AUP IN GRIN SRE ET AIR BEMIS RIN A EGER o HE BE RGR IR Proxpress M407SHR Proxpress M4075FX KEE A RE GB 25956 2010 5 Appendix 153 Regulatory information Correct disposal of this product Waste electrical amp electronic equipment Applicable in countries with separate collection systems pa This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of mat
244. om gt find your product 5 Support or Downloads 6 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine A You cannot print PDF files that are restricted Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing Using the right click menu You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing 1 Right click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added program depends on how the PDF file was created The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version 1 7 and below 2 Select the machine to use For higher versions you must open the file to print it 3 Customize the machine settings 4 Special Features Printing features 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported Printing a document When you print with a Mac you need to check the printer driver settings in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Mac 1 Open the document to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling other options and make sure that your machine is selected Click OK 4 Op
245. on the touch screen Item Description This option allows users to select sending receiveing Manual TX RX fax manually using the Qon Hook Dial button extension telephone or a handset 3 Useful Setting Menus 233 Item Description Scan feature FTP Feature Sets scan destination to an FTP server You scan the FTP Default originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server see Scanning to FTP SMB server on page 288 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or FTP models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 PE y e SMB Feature Sets scan destination to an SMB server You scan the SMB Default originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server SMB see Scanning to FTP SMB server on page 288 To change the menu options Sets scan destination to an shared folder server You Local PC scan the originals and send the scanned image to an e Press scan gt 13 Menu gt Scan Feature on the control panel folder server see Using shared folder features on page 308 Or Scan to gt 3 Menu gt Scan Feature on the control panel Sets scan destination to a usb connected computer For the model with a touch screen press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Network PC You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a Next gt Default Setting gt Scan Default on the touch screen directory such as My Documents see Basic Scanning
246. oner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Glossary Glossary Gateway IEEE A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 A shade of gray that represents light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots Mass storage device Mass storage device commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral
247. onnecting from a network When the wireless function is off the machine automatically tries to re connect to the access point or wireless router with the previously used wireless connection settings and address WU In the following cases the machine automatically re connects to the wireless network e The machine is turned off and on again The access point or wireless router is turned off and on again Canceling the connection process To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to the wireless network press and release the x Cancel or Stop Clear on the control panel You need to wait 2 minutes to re connect to the wireless network To disconnect the wireless network connection press the 9 WPS button on the control panel for more than two seconds When the Wi Fi network is in idle mode The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off When the Wi Fi network is being used While the machine waits until the current job is finished the light blinks fast on the WPS LED Then the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS LED turns off Using the menu button LA Some menus may not appear in the display depending on model or optional goods If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless
248. onnecting to the access point or wireless router b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network Connecting in PIN mode 1 The network configuration report including PIN must be printed see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 In ready mode press and hold the Stop or Stop Clear button on the control panel for about 5 seconds You can find your machine s PIN Press and hold the 63 WPS button on the control panel for more than 4 seconds until the status LED stays on The machine starts connecting to the access point or wireless router You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point or wireless router The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight digit PIN The WPS LED blinks in the order below a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED The machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 194 Wireless network setup Re connecting to a network Disc
249. onsumption can be completely avoided only when the power cable is not connected a c d The power consumption of power save mode may be affected by machine s status setting conditions operating environment e f Wireless models only see Features by models on page 8 5 Appendix ga Specifications Print media specifications Print media weight Capacity Type Size Dimensions Tray1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Manual feeder Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 70 to 85 g m 19 to 23 Ibs 70 to 85 g m 19 to 23 Ibs 70 to 85 g m 19 to 23 Ibs Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches bond bond bond US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches AA 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 69 inches 250 sheets of 80 g m 50sheetsof80g m 20 1 sheet of 80 g m 20 Ibs Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches 20 Ibs bond eons pend JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches 150 sheets of 75 g m 20 Ibs bond Envelope Envelope Monarch 98x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches Not available in tray1 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ibs Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12x 9 5 inches optional tray bond bond Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope
250. ools 312 Easy Capture Manager 313 Samsung AnyWeb Print 314 Easy Eco Driver 315 Using SyncThru Web Service 316 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 320 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 321 Using Samsung Printer Status 324 Using Samsung Printer Experience 326 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 332 Accessing management tools Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs N e For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Apps Find Samsung Printers ud Under Samsung Printers you can see installed management tools J Click the management tool you want to use VI e After installing the driver for some management tools you can access them directly from the Start menu gt Programs or All Programs e For Windows 8 after installing the driver for some management tools you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile 5 Useful Management Tools 312 Easy Capture Manager KA e Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 8 Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited 5 Usef
251. opper and then close the cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the cover open Load Program Left Page Use this option to print left page of the book e Right Page Use this option to print right page of the book e Both Page Use this option to print both pages of the book K This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Description This option allows you to save the current settings for future use You can also use the previous settings from the last jobs 3 Useful Setting Menus 226 Copy KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Press SS copy gt Menu 5 Copy Setup on the control panel Or Menu 5 Copy Setup on the control panel Item Description The copy options can be set to those most frequently h faul Change Default ied 3 Useful Setting Menus Fax Item Description Fax Feature The default document settings produce good results when using typical text based originals However if you Resolution send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax see Resolution on page 79 Some menus may not appear in the display depending options or models If so it is
252. opy a book This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Border Erase Erases certain amount of top bottom right and left border of the original Stamp You can apply the stamp feature e Stamp Activate You can activate the stamp feature e Item Prints the time and date IP address page number device information comment or user ID to the copy output e Opacity You can select the transparency e Position Sets the position 3 Useful Setting Menus 224 Copy Item Watermark Description The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document ID Copy This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card see ID card copying on page 73 N Up Copy 2 Up 4 Up Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper You can select the direction in which information is copied on a page i IN II N INN est 3 Useful Setting Menus 225 Copy Item Book Copy Description Item The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire Save Program book If the book is too thick lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the st
253. or IPv6 DHCPv6 address configuration If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network you can set one of the following options for default dynamic host configuration 2 e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Select Menu gt Network gt TCP IP IPv6 gt DHCPv6 Config on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select O Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt TCP IP IPv6 gt DHCPv6 Config on the touch screen Press OK to select the required value you want For the model with a touch screen select the option you want using arrows and press back to save the selection Router Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router Always Use Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request Never Use Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request 2 Using a Network Connected Machine IPv6 configuration From the SyncThru Web Service Activating IPv6 N Aa wl Kk Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxX in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator Type in the below default ID and password We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons
254. or driver installation Printers Not Found Your machine may not be turned on Turn on your computer and the machine USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine Connect the machine to your computer using the USB cable The machine does not support wireless networking see Features by models on page 8 Connecting Failure SSID Not Found 2 Using a Network Connected Machine aaa Wireless network setup e The machine is unable to find the network name SSID you have selected or entered Check the network name SSID on your access point and try connecting again e Your access point is not turned on Turn on your access point Connecting Failure Invalid Security Security is not configured correctly Check the configured security on your access point and machine Connecting Failure General Connection Error e Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine Check the USB cable and your machine s power Connecting Failure Connected Wired Network Your machine is connected with a wired network cable Remove the wired network cable from your machine Connecting Failure Assigning the IP address e Cycle the power for the access point or wireless router and machine PC Connection Error e The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine Fora DHCP network environment The machine receives the IP address automatically DH
255. or security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings 6 Click Wireless 5 Custom You can also turn the Wi Fi network on off Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing Wi Fi Direct is an easy to setup peer to peer connection method between the Wi Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode With Wi Fi Direct you can connect your printer to a Wi Fi Direct network while concurrently connecting to an access point You can also use a wired network and a Wi Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print documents both from Wi Fi Direct and from a wired network 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 209 Wireless network setup 3 e You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the printer s Wi Fi Direct The supported protocol list may differ from your model Wi Fi Direct networks do NOT support IPv6 network filtering IPSec WINS and SLP services The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is 3 Setting up Wi Fi Direct You can enable Wi Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods From the USB cable connected computer recommended After the driver installation is complete Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be used to change Wi Fi Direct settings Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windo
256. ord Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security enabled Enter the Network Password of the access point or router 12 If your printer supports Wi Fi Direct and this function is disabled its corresponding screen will appears If you want to enable Wi Fi Direct check the checkbox and click Next If not click just Next Wireless Settings Wi Fi Direct Settings Your printer supports Wi Fi Direct Since your printer is a Wi Fi enabled printer you can use Wi Fi Direct to enable your mobile device to easily connect to your printer Do you want to turn on WI Fi Direct on your printer Yes want to turn on Wi Fi Direct on my printer Help Next gt Cancel WA You can also start to build Wi Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer _ Manager see Setting up Wi Fi Direct on page 210 Wi Fi Direct Name The default Wi Fi Direct Name is the model name and the maximum length is 23 characters e Password setting is the numeric string and the size is 8 64 characters 1 3 When the wireless network settings are completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 203 Wireless network setup 14 Wireless network set up is completed After the installation is finished Creating the
257. ors Adhesives Should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing serious jams Curl Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 155 Media and tray Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other Preprinted paper indications of separation Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels When loading preprinted paper the printed side should be facing up with an Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feeding turn paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed components e Donotruna sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Donotuselabels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock Custom sized paper e Must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second about 170 C 338 F e Preprinted paper i
258. ouch screen 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 210 Wireless network setup From the network connected computer If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point you can enable and configure Wi Fi Direct from SyncThru Web Service Access SyncThru Web Service select Settings gt Network Settings gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Direct Enable or disable Wi Fi Direct and set other options 2 e For Linux OS users Print an IP network configuration report to check the output see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 Access SyncThru Web Service select Settings gt Network Settings gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Direct Enable or disable Wi Fi Direct Setting up the mobile device After setting up Wi Fi Direct from the printer refer to the user manual of the mobile device you are using to set its Wi Fi Direct After setting up Wi Fi Direct you need to download the mobile printing application For example Samsung Mobile printer to print from your smartphone 2 When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your mobile device select the printer and the printer s LED will blink Press the WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile device If your mobile device does not support Wi Fi Direct you need to enter the Network Key of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button Troubleshooting for wireless network Problems during setup
259. over page The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on during cover page printing the cover page When printing a document in Mac with Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly KU Refer to the Mac User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages 6 Troubleshooting Operating system problems Common Linux problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print e Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not open Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the machine is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine from the printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains Stopped press the Start button Normal operation of the machine should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occur e Check if your application has special print options such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit t
260. overnment documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP Glossary Glossary WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wireless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security WPS The Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for establishing a wireless home network If your wireless access point supports WPS you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portab
261. ow the instructions in the installation window Connect your machine to the network with a network cable Turn on the machine From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP 5 SetIP Click the g iconin the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all the settings are correct IPv4 configuration using SetIP Mac Before using the SetIP program disable the computer firewall from System Preferences gt Security gt Firewall A The following instructions may vary from your model N AO WwW Kk Connect your machine to the network with a network cable Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop For Mac OS X 10 8 Double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Clic
262. ow to clear the problem Light or faded print Aa Aa Aa Aa Aa Condition Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc Suggested solutions e Ifa vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page the toner supply is low Install a new toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 e The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough If the entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set the paper type to Recycled see Opening printing preferences on page 64 6 Troubleshooting 343 Printing quality problems Condition Toner specks Suggested solutions Th
263. ow voltage equipment The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure
264. owing procedures To re install it use the command install i to reinstall the binaries 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 185 Installing driver over the network Setting up the printer To add the printer to your UNIX system run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps 1 2 Ul 8 9 Type the name of the printer Select the appropriate printer model from the model list Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the Type field This is optional Specify any printer description in the Description field This is optional Specify the printer location in the Location field Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network connected printers On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type only the DNS name is possible numeric IP address is not allowed Queue type shows the connection as Ipd or jetdirect in the corresponding list box Additionally usb type is available on Sun Solaris OS Select Copies to set the number of copies Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted 1 0 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order 12 Click OK to add the printer 11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 186 IPv6 configuration A IPv6 is supported
265. ows Vista Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 1 GB 15 GB Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB 2 GB 16 GB Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Server 2008 R2 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz x86 or 1 4 GHz x64 processors 2 GHz or faster 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Windows 8 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB 2 GB 16 GB Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have administrator rights can install the software e Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine 5 Appendix 148 Specifications Mac Operating system Requirements Recommended CPU RAM Free HDD space Mac OS X 10 5 Intel processors 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel processors 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB Mac OS X 10 7 10 8 Intel processors 2 GB 4GB Linux Items Requirements Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 6 32 64 bit Fedora 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 32 64 bit OpenSuSE 10 2 10 3 11 0 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 32 64 bit Mandriva 2007 2008 2009 2009 1 2010 32 64 bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7
266. p fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving gt Duplex Print on the control panel For the model with a touch screen select A Fax 5 select the menu you want gt select Duplex from the sub menus gt on the touch screen Off Prints in Normal mode Long Edge Prints pages to be read like a book 3 Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection 4 Special Features 306 Fax features Receiving faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax WA If fax is received and being printed other copy and print jobs cannot be processed at the same time 4 Special Features Using shared folder features This feature allows you to use the machine s memory as a shared folder The advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder Using the shared folder through your computer s window You can use the shared folder in the same was as the normal computer Create This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder You also store the y7 see Features by models on p
267. pan may differ When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using Otherwise new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions A Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured toner Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine s warranty 3 Maintenance EJ Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s performance and capacity 2 Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8 Accessory Function Part name Memory module Extends your machine s memory capacity ML MEM370 512 MB Optional tray Ifyou are experiencing frequent paper supply problems you can attach an additional 520 M3370 M3870 M4070 M4072 series SL sheet tray SCF3800 M3375 M3875 M4075 series SL SCF3805 IEEE 1284B parallel Allows you to use various interface e ML PAR100 Connector When installing the printer driver with an IEEE1284B parallel connector the y machine might not be found and after install
268. phone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e Ifyou intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may exp
269. press Log out on the touch screen and log in as a different account 4 Press OK Scanning to Google Drive Dropbox and Evernote 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Press Scan to Cloud on the touch screen Select your cloud service from Destination List Select the folder you want to scan to If necessary press E Option settings gt select the scan settings you want a uu fb W 7 Press Start on the touch screen Scanning begins 4 Special Features 291 Scan features Scanning from image editing program You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as Adobe Photoshop if the software is TWAIN compliant Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software a uu fb W Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop Click File gt Import and select the scanner device Set the scan options Scan and save your scanned image Scanning using the WIA driver Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of
270. print photos e Android OS 2 1 or higher documents and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet Samsung Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC It connects your mobile device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi Fi access point Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn t necessary just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application and it will automatically detect compatible Samsung printers Besides printing photos 40S 4 0 or higher iPod Touch iPhone iPad web pages and PDFs scanning is also supported If you have a Samsung multifunction printer scan any document into a JPG PDF or PNG format for quick and easy viewing on your mobile device Downloading Samsung Mobile Print To download Samsung Mobile Print go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store App Store on your mobile device and just search for Samsung Mobile Print You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your computer iOS 4 0 or higher Android 2 1 or higher Galaxy series and Android mobile devices Android 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 215 AirPrint KA e Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature Check the box your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Vario
271. ption Digital signature the PDF files when you scan the originals in PDF format Select On to digital signature in PDF file and set up a digital signature To open the file users need to enter the digital signature Email Confirmation You can set the machine to print email confirmation result report a e Ifyou select On Error the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful e Ifa report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support Unknown could be printed instead of the characters fonts in the report Subject Sets an email s subject From Sets a sender s email address cc Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient BCC The same as CC but the recipient s name is not displayed Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the WSD connected computer if it supports the WSD Web Service for Device feature PDF Encryption Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in PDF format Select On to encrypt the PDF file and set upa password To open the file users need to enter the password Save Program Load Program This option allows you to save the current settings for future use You can also use the previous settings from the last jobs 3 Useful Setting Menus System setup Item Description Machine setup Selects the format for displaying time between 12 hr and Clock Mode
272. r printer list Click IP and select HP Jetdirect Socket in Protocol Enter the machine s IP address in the Address input field Enter the queue name in the Queue input field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first If Auto Select does not work properly choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using Click Add After the installation is finished click Close You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Install the Linux driver and add network printer 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz file and open the new directory Double click the cdroot gt autorun The Samsung installer window opens Click Next The add printer wizard window opens Click Next Select network printer and click Search button The machine s IP address and model name appears on list field Select your machine and click Next o ON A UU BW N 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 183 Installing driver over the network 10 Input the printer description and Next 1 1 After the machine is added click Finish 1 2 When installation
273. r the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes highlights and repeat steps 5 You can add up to 10 destinations Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore Enter the job name and the time For the model with a touch screen enter the time gt Next gt press Direct Input or Fax List gt enter the fax number using number keypad on the touch screen If you set a time earlier than the current time the fax will be sent at that time on the following day The original is scanned into memory before transmission The machine returns to ready mode The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set KA You can check the list of delayed fax jobs Press Menu gt System Setup gt Report gt Fax Scheduled Jobs on the control panel Press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Reports gt Fax Schedule Jobs on the touch screen Canceling a reserved fax job Press amp fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Cancel Job on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen press fil Job Status gt Current Job gt Next on the touch screen Select the fax job you want and press OK For the model with a touch screen press I cancel from fax job you want on the touch screen 4 Special Features 299
274. r the surrounding area is contaminated with toner we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth Dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine 3 Maintenance Cleaning the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems A To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine Use a dry lint free cloth to clean the machine Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine Illustrations on t
275. r using the e mail notification option KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens 3 From the Security tab select System Security 5 System Administrator 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Samsung Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features below Image Scanning Use for scanning single or multiple pictures Document Scanning Use for scanning documents with text or text and images Text Converting Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format Book Scanning Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner SNS Upload Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or existing images to a variety of social networking sites SNS E
276. rating environment and understand all of these instructions before using the machine After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference A Warning Important safety symbols vo O Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is CI not grounded e e e e e Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter This could result in electric shock or fire O Do not place anything on top of the machine water small metal or ng heavy objects candles lit cigarettes etc Warnin Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe CI A g personal injury or death This could result in electric shock or fire a O e Ifthe machine gets overheated it releases smoke makes Gainion Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor 464 strange noises or generates an odd odor immediately turn off personal injury or property damage a the power switch and unplug the machine Do not attempt e The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of S emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out This could result in electric shock or fire 8 Do not bend or place heavy objects on the power cord E p Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire y Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord do not handle the pom plug with wet hands sa This could result in electric shock or fi
277. re 1 Introduction 115 Safety information A Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation remove the power plug from the electrical outlet This could result in electric shock or fire Be careful the paper output area is hot Burns could occur If the machine has been dropped or if the cabinet appears damaged unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet do not attempt to force it in Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet or this could result in electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords This could result in electric shock or fire and or injury to your pet Operating method A Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing It can cause damage to the machine Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray You may get injured Be careful when replacing paper or removing jammed paper New paper has sharp edges and can cause
278. re Shared Key pass phrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients e Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES TKIP AES e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Password Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security settings Enter the Network Password of the access point or router When the network connection window appears disconnect the network cable Then click Next The network cable connection can interfere with searching for wireless devices If your printer supports Wi Fi Direct and this function is disabled its corresponding screen will appears If you want to enable Wi Fi Direct check the checkbox and click Next If not click just Next Wi Fi Direct Settings Your printer supports Wi Fi Direct Since your printer is a Wi Fi enabled printer you can use Wi Fi Direct to enable your mobile device to easly connect to your printer Do you want to tum on Wi Fi Direct on your printer Tl Yes I want to turn on Wi Fi Direct on my printer WiFi Direct Name You can also start to build Wi Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager see Setting up Wi Fi Direct on page 210 Wi Fi Direct Name The default Wi Fi Dir
279. rect time and date using arrows or numeric keypad see Understanding keypad on page 261 e Month 01 to 12 e Day 01 to 31 e Year requires four digits e Hour 01 to 12 e Minute 00 to 59 Clock Mode You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12 hour or 24 hour format 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup G Machine s basic settings Power Save When you are not using the machine for a while use e See Setting the paper size and type on page 57 this feature to save power See Setting up the address book on page 263 KA When you press the Power Wake Up button start printing or a fax is received the product will wake up from the power saving mode Altitude Adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level Before you set the altitude value determine the altitude where you are see Altitude adjustment on page 258 3 Select the option you want then press OK 4 Press OK to save the selection For the model with a touch screen press back to save the selection 5 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home Gy icon to return to ready mode K Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine See Entering various characters on page 261 See Understanding keypad on page 261 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray This chapter p
280. rom the control panel Then set the paper type from the Printing preferences window gt Paper tab gt Paper Type see Opening printing preferences on page 64 For example if you want to print on labels select Labels for Paper Type K e When printing the special media you must follow the loading guideline p j a BU oh See Printing on special media on page 52 e When papers overlap when printing using multi purpose or manual When using special media we recommend you feed one sheet at a time feeder tray open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try 4 see Print media specifications on page 146 printing again e Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the multi purpose or manual feeder tray For information about setting the paper type and size on the control To see for paper weights for each sheet refer to Print media specifications on panel see Setting the paper size and type on page 57 page 146 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 152 Media and tray Envelope Types Tray 1 Optional tray KAR ma ae mae i Sa E nanual feeder Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes Plain i To print an envelope
281. rovides information on how to load print media into your machine a e Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements e Make sure not to use the photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine e Using inflammable print media can cause a fire e Use designated print media see Print media specifications on page 146 The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire Tray overview To change the size you need to adjust the paper guides 1 Tray extend lever 2 Paper length guide 3 Paper width guide If you do not adjust the guide it may cause paper registration image skew or jamming of the paper 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray The duplex unit is preset to Letter LGL or A4 size depending on your country To change the paper size adjust the guide as shown below 2 Paper quantity indicator shows the amount of paper in the tray Si Pr If you do not adjust the guide it may cause paper registration image skew or jamming of the paper 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup as Media and tray 2 Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate Loading paper in the tray them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of
282. rt a print job e Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job KU e Click the question mark mg from the upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about EES e Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru Web Service a This option is not available when you use XPS driver 4 Special Features Printing features Printing Using Direct Printing Utility There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility Available for Windows OS users only 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs e Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or For Windows 8 from Charms select Search gt Apps optional goods see Software on page 8 2 Find Samsung Printers gt Direct Printing Utility Select your machine from the Select Printer drop down list and click e e e e ege 3 What is Direct Printing Utility Boie Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your 4 Select the file you wish to print and click Open machine to print without having to open the file a I j The file is added in the Select Files section To install this program 5 Customize the machine settings for your needs Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung c
283. rvices running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU TT 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanne
284. s M387xFW M407xFD M407xFR M407xHR 17 07 kg 37 63 Ibs M407xFX 17 23 kg 37 99 Ibs Noise Level Ready mode Less than 26 dB A Print mode M337x series Less than 55 dB A M387x M407 x series Less than 57 dB A Copy Scan Scanner glass mode M337 x series Less than 57 dB A M387x M407x series Less than 58 dB A Document feeder M337x series Less than 57 dB A e M387x M407x series Less than 58 dB A Temperature Operation 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Storage packed 20 to 40 C 4 to 104 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storage packed 10 to 90 RH 220 volt models AC 220 240V 5 Appendix 144 Specifications Items Description Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 700 W Ready mode Less than 10 W M407XxFX Less than 15 W Power save mode e M337xFD M337xHD M387xFD M387xHD M407xFD M407xFR M407xHR Less than 1 1 W M387xFW Less than 1 6 W Wi Fi Direct on Less than 2 8 W e M407xFX Less than 3 5 W Power off mode Less than 0 1 W Wireless Module SPW B4319U Dimensions and weight are measured without a handset and other accessories Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested basic machine installation A4 paper simplex printing See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage V frequency hertz and of current A for your machine Power c
285. s ona a T DN Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Watermark Deleting a watermark To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window aa TOY 4 Special Features Printing features Item Overlay AA Description This option is available only when you use the L SPL printer driver see Software on page 8 An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image a e The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark e The resolution of the overlay document must be t
286. s on page 80 Fax Item Description Memory Send Fax can be customized through detailed options On Hook Dial Access a dial tone to send fax Speed Dial Send Fax image to destination from speed dial list Group Dial Send Fax image to destination from group dial list Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode or inserts a pause into a fax number Redial in edit mode see Redialing the fax number on page 297 Sends a fax to multiple destinations see Sending a fax to multiple destinations on page 78 Multi Send a You cannot send a color fax using this feature Delay Send Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you Delayed Send will not be present see Delaying a fax transmission on page 298 KA You cannot send a color fax using this feature Item Description Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax PC etc If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful Send Forward Receive Forward e See Forwarding a sent fax to another destination on page 300 e See Forwarding a received fax on page 301 Stores the received fax in memory without printing out To print received documents you need to enter the password You can prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people see Receiving in secure receiving mode on pag
287. s on page 91 After installing the optional memory you can use the advanced printing features such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer properties window You can control the active job queue and file policy see Using optional device features on page 309 3 Maintenance 103 j Installing accessories 3 Maintenance 104 Monitoring the supplies life If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned Replace the corresponding parts if necessary Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Select Menu gt System Setup gt Maintenance gt Supplies Life on the control panel 1 OR For the model with a touch screen select Oj Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Report gt Supplies Information on the touch screen 2 Select the option you want and press OK For the model with a touch screen press Yes when the confirmation windows appears 3 Press Stop or Stop Clear button or home gy icon to return to ready mode 3 Maintenance 105 Setting the toner low alert If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low a message or LED informing the user to c
288. s which simplifies many tasks A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network access Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution Glossary Glossary SMB TCP IP Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server
289. s Book gt Phone Book gt View Lists gt Individual Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View Lists gt Group gt on the touch screen BSE options gt Add on the touch screen 2 Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK 2 Enter a group dial number and press OK For the model with a touch screen select the speed dial number you For the model with a touch screen press the Group Members 5 Phone want to edit Book 3 Change the name and press OK For the model with a touch screen change the name fax number email 2 If an entry is already stored in the baa you chonse the display mow the address and speed dial number Press Back and go to step 5 message to allow you to change it To start over with another speed dial number press 4 Change the fax number and press OK 5 Prees Stop Clear button or home g icon to return to ready 3 Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial s name to put in the group mode For the model with a touch screen select an individual address and press Back 4 Select the name and number you want and press OK 4 Special Features 264 Setting up the address book 5 Select Yes when Add appears 3 Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK then Add appears E ial in th K Delete amp Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group NLEFA Speed fial number stored M the Group ana press OR Delete appears 7
290. s access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu and touch screen Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine For models that do not have the Menu on the control panel this feature is not applicable see Control panel overview on page 23 Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models 3 Useful Setting Menus 220 Print Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Press Menu gt Print Setup on the control panel e Forthe model with a touch screen press o Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Print Setup on the touch screen Item Description Selects the direction in which information is printed ona page Portrait Orientation e Landscape Duplex You can set the machine to print on both sides of paper Item Description You can enter the number of print using the number Copies keypad Sets the resolution option The higher the setting the Resolution i sharper printed characters and graphics Clear Text Prints text darker than on a normal document It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics Edge Enhance N a for improving readability T
291. s and SMTP server information the machine status toner cartridge shortage or machine error will be sent to a certain person s e mail automatically This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator KA Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens From the Settings tab select Machine Settings gt Email Notification bid 2 If you have not configured outgoing server environment go to Settings gt Network Settings gt Outgoing Mail Server SMTP to configure network environment before setting e mail notification 4 Select Enable check box to use the Email Notification 5 Useful Management Tools 318 Using SyncThru Web Service 5 Click Add button to add e mail notification user 4 Enter the name of the administrator phone number location and email Set the recipient name and e mail address es with notification items address you want to receive an alert for 5 Click Apply Click Apply e2 KA If the firewall is activated the e mail may not be sent successfully In that case contact the a network administrator Setting the system administrator s information This setting is necessary fo
292. s book You can check your address book settings by printing a list 4 Special Features Registering authorized users 9 Enter User Name Login ID Password Confirm Password E mail This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods Address and Fax Number see Features by models on page 8 K You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual s To send a scanned image copy image or fax data through email or via network after this group is created server safely you must register account information of authorized users to your local machine using SyncThru Web Service 1 0 Click Apply 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 4 Click Security 5 User Access Control 5 Authentication 5 Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode and select Local Authentication in the Authentication Method and click 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK in the confirmation pop up window 8 Click User Profile 5 Add 4 Special Features 268 Printing features 2 e For basic printing features refer to the Basic Guide see Basic printing on page 62 e This feature may not be available depending on mod
293. s dem dt Festnetz aus dem DOMINICA Mobilfunk max 0 60 Anruf www samsung com latin_en English GEORGIA 8 800 555 555 www samsung com DRC 499999 www samsung com 0800 10077 www samsung com GHANA africa en 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com 0302 200077 ECUADOR pauln Spanish 80111 SAMSUNG 80111 726 www samsung com gr www samsung com RE 7864 only from land line latm en Eng lin 30 210 6897691 from mobile EGYPT 08000 726786 www samsung com and land line EIRE 0818 717100 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 362 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 1 800 299 0013 WebSite www samsung com latin Spanish Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite 0120 327 527 GUATEMALA www samsung com latin_en English 800 27919267 www samsung com latin Spanish HONDURAS www samsung com latin_en English 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk Chinese HONG KONG www samsung com hk_en English HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com hu 1800 3000 8282 www samsung com in INDIA 1800 266 8282 0800 1 12 8888 Toll Free www samsung com id INDONESIA 021 5699 7777 IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ITALIA HHP 800 Msamsung 800 67267864 JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com JAPAN www samsung com 800 22273 www samsung com JORDAN 065777444 Levant En
294. s the actual amount may differ depending on the operating system used computing performance application software connection method media type thickness media size job complexity etc Enter the machine IP address of your printer http xxx XxX xxx xxX in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 1 Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows 2 Click Login on the upper right of SyncThru Web Service website see Secure printing Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 3 Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt RAM Disk Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or l y models If so it is not applicable to your machine 4 Enable RAM Disk e You might not be able to print a complex document using the RAM Disk Install an optional memory to print a complex document KA This features may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine When you usea printing device in an office school or other public place you can protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the secure prng tatune Printing secure documents from the control panel KU Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 or Control panel overview on page 23 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 68 Basic printing Select Menu gt Job Management gt
295. sage The Eco function Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 or Control panel overview on page 23 Setting Eco mode on the control panel allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco friendly printing It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for If you press the Eco button from the control panel Eco mode is enabled The some models default setting of Eco mode is duplex printing long edge multiple pages per side 2 up skip blank pages and toner save Some features may not be available depending on model 1 Select 3 Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Eco Settings on the control panel Or press the Eco button on the control panel ASA OR r Double sided printing long edge feature is only available for duplex models see Various features on page 10 For the model with a touch screen select WYg Eco gt Settings gt Next e Depending on the printer driver you use skip blank pages may not work on the touch screen properly If skip blank pages feature does not work properly set the feature from the Easy Eco Driver see Easy Eco Driver on page 315 2 Select the option you want and press OK e Default Mode Select this to turn on or off the Eco mode Tr Off Set the Eco mode off You can set the eco value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program On Set the Eco mode on
296. scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending in the cloud service see Scanning with cloud service on page 291 on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions especially using enhanced dpi TWAIN TWAIN is one of the a preset imaging applications Scanning an image launches the selected application enabling you to control the scanning process This feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection see Scanning from image editing program on page 292 Basic scanning method e WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable see Scanning using the WIA driver on page 292 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Various features on page 10 Samsung Easy Document Creator You can use this program to scan images or documents see Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator on page 293 Youcan scan the originals with your machine via a USB cable or the network The i USB Memory You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents an USB memory device see Scanning to a USB memory device on page Scan to PC Scan the originals from the control panel Then the scanned 82 data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder see Basic
297. screen select eet Copy gt ID Copy on the touch screen ID card copying 2 Place Front Side Press Start appears on the display For the model with a touch screen follow the instructions on the touch screen 3 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature e Ifthe machine set to Eco mode this feature is not available 4 Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ 4 Press Start Your machine begins scanning the front side 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying 5 Place Rear Side Press Start appears on the display For the model with a touch screen follow the instructions on the touch K e Ifyou do not press the lt gt Start button only the front side will be screen copied e Ifthe original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be 6 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows printed indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid
298. st Prints the PS PS3 font list EPSON Font Prints the EPSON font list KSC5843 Font Prints the KSC5843 font list KSC5895 Font Prints the KSC5895 font list KSSM Font Prints the KSSM font list Service Print a report of printout counts for each user K Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or page 32 models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup To change the menu options e Press Menu 5 System Setup 5 Maintenance on the control panel Item Description Appears when the toner cartridge is empty You can clear CLR Empty Msg E a as the empty message Sh th ly life indicat Monitoring th Supplies Life ows Raupp y life indicators see Monitoring the supplies life on page 105 All j he col i h image Mar ows you to adjust the color setting such as color registration color density etc TonerLow Alert Customizes the alert toner low or toner empty see Setting the toner low alert on page 106 Imaging Unit Low Alert Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty Serial Number Shows the machine s serial number When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website you can find this Ram Disk Enables disables RAM Disk to manage jobs Address book setup K Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so
299. stallation agreements in the installation 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Installing driver over the network 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set see Setting IP Following command line are effective and operated when command is address on page 175 used with s or S But h H or are exceptional commands that can be operated solely 2 From Charms select Settings gt Change PC settings gt Devices 3 Click Add a device Command line Definition Description Discovered machines will be shown on the screen j i sor Starts silent installation Installs machine drivers i without prompting any Uls or 4 Click the model name or host name you wish to use IS ep PAD ula oad user intervention K You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s host name see Printing a network configuration report on page 175 5 The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update Silent installation Mode Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user intervention Once you start the installation the machine driver and software are automatically installed on you computer You can start the silent installation by typing s or S in the command window Command line Parameters Following table shows commands th
300. supports wireless networking Wireless networking may not be available depending on the model see Features by models on page 8 If the IPv6 network seems to not be working set all the network settings to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting Understanding your network type Typically you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time Infrastructure mode This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs Small Office Home Office This mode uses an access point to communicate with the wireless machine Ad hoc mode This mode does not use an access point The wireless computer and wireless machine communicate directly Wireless network name and network password Wireless networks require higher security so when an access point is first set up a network name SSID the type of security used and a Network Password are created for the network Ask your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine installation 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 190 Wireless network setup Introducing wireless set up methods You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer Choose the setting method from the below table 2 Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country see Features by models on page 8 Connecti m l Description amp Reference
301. switch to Scanners Configuration 4 Select the scanner on the list Unified Driver Configurator Scanners configuration E l Selected scanner Vendor Model Type 5 Click Properties 6 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 7 From the Scanner Properties window click Preview 4 Special Features 295 Scan features 8 The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Editing an image with Image Manager Preview Pane The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image 9 Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview Pane 10 Select the option you want 11 Scan and save your scanned image 2 For later use you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type drop down list 4 Special Features 296 Fax features 2 For basic faxing features refer to the Basic Guide see Basic faxing on page 76 Automatic redialing When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number The redial time depends on the country s factory default setting When the display shows Retry Redial press Start button to redial the number without waiting To cancel the automatic redialing press Stop or Stop Clear button
302. t a group dial number go to step 7 Enter the second fax number and press OK The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 5 and 6 You can add up to 10 destinations Once you have entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial number 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic faxing 7 When you have finished entering fax numbers select No at the Another Resolution No prompt and press OK For the model with a touch screen press Send on the touch screen The default document settings produce good results when using typical text based originals However if you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax Receiving a fax KU The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Fax on page 228 Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically 1 Select 48 fax gt B Menu gt Fax Feature gt Resolution on the receives the fax control panel OR Adjusting the document settings For the model with a touch screen select gak Fax gt WEN Option settings 5 Resolution on the
303. t a service representative 6 Troubleshooting 344 Printing quality problems Condition Vertical lines Suggested solutions If black vertical streaks appear on the page The surface drum part of the cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched Remove the cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Replacing the imaging unit on page 100 If white vertical streaks appear on the page The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable Change to a lighter weight paper e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading e Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Thoroughly redistribute the toner see Redistributing toner on page 94 Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc e Clean the inside of the machine see Cleaning the machine on page 107 Check the paper type and quality e Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 6 Troubleshooting 345 Printing quality problems Condition Vertical
304. t one copy first to check then print the rest of the copies later Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print cline Mees Store Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing Store and Print This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time Spool This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data If you select this setting the printer spools the document into the mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue decreasing the computer s work load Print Schedule Select this setting to print the document at a specified time E e Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel e User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows e Enter Password If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured you have to enter the password for the document box This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel e Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can sta
305. t print Open the print queue list and remove the document from the list see Canceling a print job on page 63 Remove the driver and install it again see Installing the driver locally on page 28 Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows see Setting your machine as a default machine on page 269 Where can I purchase accessories or supplies Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer Visit www samsung com supplies Select your country region to view product service information The status LED flashes or remains constantly on Turn the product off and on again Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly see Understanding the status LED on page 134 A paper jam has occurred Open and close the door see Front view on page 21 Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly see Clearing jams on page 116 Printouts are blurry The toner level might be low or uneven Shake the toner cartridge see Redistributing toner on page 94 Try a different print resolution setting see Opening printing preferences on page 64 Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Where can download the machine s driver You can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your pro
306. t you want For the model with a touch screen press TIN Option settings gt select the option you want using arrows gt Start button on the touch screen The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server 4 Special Features 289 Scan features Scanning to WSD 9 The IP address for WSD printer is http IP address ws example http 111 111 111 111 ws Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the If no WSD printer is displayed in the list click The printer that I want isn t listed gt Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and computer supports the WSD Web Service for Device feature To use the WSD te j select Web Services Device from Device type Then enter the printer s feature you need to install the WSD printer driver on your computer For iPaddiecs Windows 7 you can install the WSD driver by Control Panel gt Devices and Printers gt Add a printer Click Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard 4 Follow the instructions in the installation window KA e The machine that does not support the network interface it will not be Scanning using the WSD feature able to use this feature see Features by models on page 8 e The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista or later version that are 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and the WSD compliant computer powered on
307. tab In this tab you can change the brightness resolution or image position of your document Text tab Set the character margin line space or the columns of the actual print output Margins tab Use Margins Set the margins for the document By default margins are not enabled The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields Set by default these values depend on the page size selected Unit Change the units to points inches or centimeters Printer Specific Settings tab Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various settings These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file 4 Special Features 284 Scan features FTP SMB You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP SMB server see 2 e For basic scanning features refer to the Basic Guide see Basic scanning Scanning to FTP SMB server on page 288 on page 75 Scan to WSD Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the computer supports the WSD Web Service for Device feature see Scanning to WSD on page 290 e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the e Scan to Cloud You can scan an image and the scanned data will be stored size of the image being
308. tallation for USB cable connected 169 driver reinstallation for USB cable connected 170 printing 280 scanning 294 system requirements 149 using SetIP 176 mac scanning 294 machine information 222 227 228 232 235 245 machine setup machine status 222 227 228 232 235 245 memory memory upgrading 103 memory hard drive feature 308 309 menu overview 32 multi purpose tray loading 50 using special media 52 N network driver installation Linux 183 Mac 182 UNIX 184 Windows 179 general setup 248 installing environment 151 introducing network programs 174 IPv6 configuration 187 SetIP program 175 176 177 207 wired network setup 175 wireless network setup 190 n up printing Mac 280 O optional tray 91 loading paper 49 ordering 91 output support 58 overlay printing create 275 delete 276 print 276 P Parallel connector ordering 91 placing a machine adjusting the altitude 258 postScript driver troubleshooting 359 preparing originals type 59 print general setup 221 mobile OS 215 mobileprint 215 print media card stock 56 envelope 53 labels 55 output support 146 preprinted paper 56 Index setting the paper size 57 using direct printing utility 279 resolution setting the paper type 57 printing a document faxing 79 special media 52 Linux 281 transparency 55 Mac 280 print menu 221 UNIX 283 safety printer preferences printing feature 269 information 15 Linux 282 problem symbols 15
309. terface and the advanced user interface Switching between the two interfaces is easy just click a button Supplies Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager Toner Toner ID To open the program H 6 rder Su ies For Windows Select Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Pag Easy Printer Manager For Windows 8 from Charms select Search gt Apps gt Samsung Printers gt Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your Samsung Easy Printer Manager 1 computer and network printers added by network discovery Windows only 5 Useful Management Tools 321 For Mac Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer information This area gives you general information about your machine You can check information such as the machine s model name IP address or Port name and machine status 2 You can view the online User s Guide Troubleshooting button This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the necessary section in the user s guide Application information Includes links for changing to the advanced settings switching UI refresh preference setting summary help and about 2 The button is used to change the user interface to the advanced settings user interface see Advanced settings user interface overview on page 322 Quick links Displays Quick links to machin
310. ters 118 inches If the installation window does not appear click Start 5 All programs 5 Accessories gt Run X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK For Windows 8 If the installation window does not appear from Charms select Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window appears click the window and select Run Setup exe Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window Then click Next 1 Introduction 28 Installing the driver locally 4 Select USB connection on the Printer Connection Type screen Then Ifyou install the driver using the supplied software CD V4 driver is not click Next installed If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen you can download from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your Follow the instructions in the installation window product gt Support or downloads Ul e Ifyou want to install Samsung s printer management tools you need to install them using the supplied software CD WU You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install Window 1 Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered on From the Windows 8 Start Screen 2 Make sure that the machine is powered on
311. ters books or other copies than expected before documents that use more toner running out of toner The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made Turn the machine off and back on 6 Troubleshooting 351 Scanning problems Condition Suggested solutions The scanner does not work e Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate e Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly e Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective Switch the printer cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the printer cable e Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port for example USB001 The unit scans very slowly e Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed e Graphics are scanned more slowly than text e Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase
312. th to the printer by entering two slashes the computer name or local IP address of the PC sharing the printer and then the share name of the printer Commands not to set the installed driver as a default machine driver It indicates installed machine driver will not be the default machine driver on your system if there are one or more printer drivers installed If there is no installed machine driver on your system then this option won t be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 181 Installing driver over the network Command line x or X Definition Uses existing machine driver files to create printer instance if it is already installed Description This command provides a way to install a printer instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver h H or up lt printer name gt or UP lt printer Removes only specified printer instance and not the driver files This command provides a way to remove only specified printer instance from your system without effecting name gt other printer drivers It will not remove printer driver files from your system dor Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove all D and applications from your installed device drivers and system application software from your system
313. the device This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab Machine Settings tab Sets options provided by your machine Network Settings tab Shows options for the network environment Sets options such as TCP IP and network protocols 5 Useful Management Tools Using SyncThru Web Service Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu Firmware Upgrade Upgrade your machine s firmware Application Management This feature is only available for models with a touch screen You can manage the applications Also you can install new applications from USB or URL License Management License Management provides settings for Installed applications and application licenses Cloning You can import or export transfer various settings machine setting network information address book etc between devices that have the Cloning feature in SyncThru Web Service Contact Information Shows the contact information Link Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check information E mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine s status by setting this option By setting information such as IP address host name e mail addres
314. the print data first and starts printing Stored Print Prints the stored data without entering a password e Secured Print Prints the stored data with entering a password Shared Folder Show the shared folders on your network and save your scanned data there 3 Useful Setting Menus 254 Scan to cloud Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 Press Scan to Cloud gt select the menu item you want gt Next on the touch screen Item Description Google Drive Sets scan destination to Google Drive Dropbox Evernote for cloud service You scan the originals and send the scanned image to Google Drive Dropbox Evernote see Evernote Scanning with cloud service on page 291 Dropbox 3 Useful Setting Menus 255 Secure release Description You can see the jobs stored in the machine and their information You can print or delete the stored jobs Item Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable t hi M jew iti pplicable to your machine see Menu overview on Stored Job page 32 Current Job Press e Secure Release on the touch screen KA Displays the list of print jobs the user has set in the printer driver Set the print jobs from the Printing preferences window gt select the mode from the Print Mode drop down list see
315. the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide 6 Troubleshooting 352 Scanning problems Condition Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Portis disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle Scanning has failed Suggested solutions There may be a copying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off 6 Troubleshooting 353 Faxing problems Condition The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working Suggested solutions Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet e Ensure that the power is turned on No dial tone e Check that the phone line is properly connected see Rear view on page 22 e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging
316. the stamp feature Item Prints the time and date IP address page number device information comment or user ID to the copy output e Opacity You can select the transparency e Position Sets the position Address Book Views or prints the address list 3 Useful Setting Menus pr System setup Item Import Setting Description Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the machine Item CLR Empty Msg Description When toner cartridge is empty this option appears You can clear the empty message Export Setting Exports data stored on the machine stick to a USB memory Toner Low Alert Customizes the toner low or toner empty alert for toner cartridge see Setting the toner low alert on page 106 Eco Settings Allows you to save print resources and enables eco friendly printing e Default Mode Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off On force On Forced Sets the Eco mode on with password If a user wants to turn the Eco mode on off the user needs to enter the password e Select Template Selects the eco template set from the SyncThru Web Service Custom Color This menu allows you to adjust contrast color by color e Default Optimizes colors automatically Print Density Allows you to manually adjust the color density for print Adjust the print density It is recommended to use the Default setting for best color quality Image Mana
317. the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using additional software KU The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 3 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers 4 Right click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes gt Start Scan New Scan application appears Ul 6 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your preferences affect the picture 4 Special Features 292 Scan features 7 Scan and save your scanned image 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 59 Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs For Windows 8 from Charms select Search 5 Apps Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format 3 Click Samsung Printers and start Samsung Easy Document Creator We OED using scan pats with the Samsung Easy Docum
318. ting features 3 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window The Printer Properties window appears The following five tabs display at the top of the window General Allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration Connection Allows you to view or select another port If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the machine port in this tab Driver Allows you to view or select another machine driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options Jobs Shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list Classes Shows the class that your machine is in Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class KU Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported see Features by models on page 8 Proceeding the print job After installing the printer choose any of the image text or PS files to print 1 Execute printui file name to print5 command For example if you are printing document1 printui document1 This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the
319. to connect your machine to a wireless network using the 9 WPS button on the control panel The Push Button Configuration PBC method allows you to connect your pressing the g WPS button on the control panel without a computer Bi machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS PBC button on a Wi Fi Protected r Ifyou want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode J Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router respectively make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine p p Jresp y Using the WPS PBC button or entering the PIN from the computer to The Personal Identification Number PIN method helps you connect your connect to the access point or wireless router varies depending on the access point or wireless router you are using Refer to the user s guide of the access point or wireless router you are using machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router When using the WPS button to set the wireless network security settings Factory default in your machine is PBC mode which is recommended for a may change To prevent this lock the WPS option for the current wireless typical wireless network environment security settings The option name may differ depending on the access point or wireless router you
320. tocol Management SetIP You can set whether to use SyncThru Web Service or not SLP You can configure SLP Service Location Protocol settings This protocol allows host applications to find services in a local area network without prior configuration Turn the power off and on after you change this option 3 Useful Setting Menus 249 Job management Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options Press 2 Menu gt Job Management on the control panel Item Description Active Job Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed Stored Job Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk Secured Job Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk Shared Folder i print job lists that are in the shared folder on 3 Useful Setting Menus 250 Job Status Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 32 To change the menu options e Press Job Status gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item Description Current Job Displays the list of jobs in progress and pending Complete Job Displays the list of completed jobs 3 Useful Setting Menus 251 Eco Some menus may not appear in the display dependi
321. tor 3 Open the Terminal program When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh 4 Click Next 5 Click Finish 1 Software Installation 2 Using a Network Connected Machine This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software Useful network programs 174 Wired network setup 175 Installing driver over the network 178 IPv6 configuration 187 Wireless network setup 190 Samsung Mobile Print 215 AirPrint 216 Google Cloud Print 217 WA Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model see Features by models on page 8 Useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a network environment For the network administrator especially managing several machines on the network is possible Before using the programs below set the IP address first e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 8 SyncThru Web Service The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the following tasks see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Check the supplies information and status Customize machine settings Set the email notification option When you set this option the ma
322. try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window 6 Troubleshooting 358 Operating system problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine does not appear on the scanners list Ensure your machine is attached to your computer connected properly via the USB port and is turned on e Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Linux Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window e Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response This usually happens when starting a scan procedure An appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if th
323. tures 3 Select your machine 1 Check the Print to file box in the Print window 4 Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer c80 Print General Select Printer 2 For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 if Set as default printer has a gt you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer Status Ready J lei Preferences Kaso e Page Range Using advanced print features on Marota i Selection Current Page Pages Collate 1 1 22 33 Ki XPS printer driver used to print XPS file format i 7 Cancel Apy See Features by models on page 8 e The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher 2 Click Print instal optional MEMO whenan ARS JoB 09E5MOLPNNERECANSEENE 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK printer is out of memory For models that provide XPS driver from the Samsung website http For example c Temp file name www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads 9 If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My i Documents Documents and Settings or Users The saved folder may Printing to a file PRN differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file 4 Special Features Printing features Understanding special printer features You can use a
324. u want on the touch screen WU If you see Not Available message check the port connection 3 Select your registered computer ID and enter the Password if necessary 4 Special Features 286 Scan features L Ul LS ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt a Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt a Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings Select the option you want and press OK For the model with a touch screen press WT Option settings gt select the option you want using arrows gt Start button on the touch screen Scanning begins Scanned image is saved in computer s C Users users name My Documents The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using K This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 Setting up an email account U A W N e2 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 316 Select Settings gt Network Settings and Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication Enter the SMTP server login name an
325. ucture network 1 Check wheter the USB cable is connected to the machine 2 Turn on your computer access point and machine 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 196 Wireless network setup 3 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 5 Select Wireless network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next Printer Connection Type Select how the printer will be connected to your computer or network USB connection Connect the printer to this computer using a USB cable Network connection If the installation window does not appear click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run son Connect the printer to the same network as this comput la If your printer is already connected to the network Pear Wataler will detect the printer I e Wireless network connection X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD ROM drive and click OK Connect the printer to the same wireless network as this compute If your printer pag Pina ka e wireless network the installer will help pases tup the wireless network This is only available for printers that support wireless networki E select if you want to install the software without connecting the printer ForWindows 8 If the installation window does not appear from Charms select et bees ees Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing X
326. uide provides information about installation advanced configuration operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments Some features may not be available depending on models or countries ADVANCED 1 Software Installation Installation for Mac 169 Reinstallation for Mac 170 Installation for Linux 171 Reinstallation for Linux 172 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Useful network programs 174 Wired network setup 175 Installing driver over the network 178 IPv6 configuration 187 Wireless network setup 190 Samsung Mobile Print 215 AirPrint 216 Google Cloud Print 217 3 Useful Setting Menus Before you begin reading a chapter 220 Print Copy Fax Scan System setup Network setup Job management Job Status Eco USB Document box Scan to cloud Secure release 4 Special Features Altitude adjustment Storing email address Entering various characters Setting up the address book Registering authorized users Printing features Scan features 221 222 228 234 238 248 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 258 259 261 263 268 269 285 ADVANCED Fax features 297 Copying problems 351 Using shared folder features 308 Scanning problems 352 Using optional device features 309 Faxing problems 354 Operating system problems 356 5 Useful Management Tools Accessing management tools 312 Easy Capture Manager 313 Samsung AnyWeb Print 314 Easy Eco Driver 315 Using SyncThru Web Service
327. uit For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in Ag leti Temor k POOT i the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows Static click 2 PE A E or een a a Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP machine driver to print from an application see Installation for Mac on address automatically DHCP page 169 For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration Using a network cable values for the machine For example If the computer s network information is shown as follows IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Then the machine s network information should be as shown below Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this feature see Rear view on page 22 IP address 169 254 133 43 Your machine is a network compatible machine To enable your machine to Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask work with your network you will need to perform some configuration Gateway 169 254 133 1 procedures 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 206 Wireless network setup 3 e After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a machine driver to print from an application see Instal
328. ul Management Tools 313 Samsung AnyWeb Print KA e Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 8 This tool helps you screen capture preview scrap and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 5 Useful Management Tools 314 Easy Eco Driver KA Available for Windows OS users only see Software on page 8 With the Easy Eco Driver you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts and more You can save frequently used settings as a preset How to use Open a document to print Open printing preference window see Opening printing preferences on page 64 From the Favorites tab select Eco Printing Preview Click OK 5 Print in the window A preview window appears uu Bb W N Select the options you want to apply to the document You can see the preview of the applied features 6 Click Print If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference window 5 Useful Management Tools 315 Using SyncThru Web Service 1 Click
329. up gt Sending gt Fax 5 Enter the recipients numbers and select the option Confirmation on the control panel Q ae a a AKEN Select the Help menu from the window and click on any option you want to Confirmation on the touch screen P k bout now about 6 Click Send Sending a fax in the computer Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present You cannot send a color fax using this feature KA This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 8 You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program documents face up into the document feeder must be installed This program will be installed when you installed the printer arivar 2 Press amp fax on the control panel 1 Open the document to be sent 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application 4 Special Features 298 f Fax features 4 Press Menu gt Fax Feature gt Delay Send on the control panel OR For the model with a touch screen select da Fax gt Delayed Send gt Next on the touch screen Go to step 8 Ente
330. ures Item Description Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet Booklet Printing KU e If you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized print media e The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what paper sizes are available e Ifyou select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without 4 org mark Print on both sides of a sheet of paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented Double Sided Printing If your machine does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The machine prints every other page of the document first After that a message appears on your computer 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description 2 Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine e None Disables this feature e Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding Double Sided Printing a i _
331. us features on page 10 AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone iPad and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS AirPrint Setting up AirPrint Bonjour mDNS and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods 1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings 5 Network Settings 6 Click AirPrint You can enable AirPrint Printing via AirPrint For example the iPad manual provides these instructions 1 Open your email photo web page or document you want to print Touch the action icon fq Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up 2 3 4 Touch Print button Print it out Cancelling print job To cancel the printing job or view the print summary click the print center icon in
332. user can select various print options 2 Select a printer that has been already added 3 Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection 4 Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies 4 Special Features 283 Printing features To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver press Properties 5 Press OK to start the print job Changing the machine settings The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options in printer Properties The following hot keys may also be used H for Help O for OK A for Apply and C for Cancel General tab Paper Size Set the paper size as A4 Letter or other paper sizes according to your requirements Paper Type Choose the type of the paper Options available in the list box are Printer Default Plain and Thick Paper Source Select from which tray the paper is used By default it is Auto Selection Orientation Select the direction in which information is printed on a page Duplex Print on both sides of paper to save paper Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd even printing Multiple pages Print several pages on one side of the paper Page Border Choose any of the border styles e g Single line hairline Double line hairline Image
333. vice complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help WA Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority t
334. view and Basic Setup EJ Media and tray Tips on using the multi purpose or manual feeder tray Load only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the multi purpose or manual feeder tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper while printing when there is still paperin the multi purpose or manual feeder tray This also applies to other types of print media Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems see Print media specifications on page 146 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose or manual feeder tray Press the push release of multi purpose or manual feeder tray and it down to open M337x series M387x M407x series 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup El Media and tray Squeeze the multi purpose or manual feeder tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force them too much Printing on special media or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew The table below shows the special media usable in tray The paper setting in the machine and driver should match to print without a paper mismatch error To change the paper setting set in the machine from the Samsung Easy Printer Manager select FE switch to advanced mode Device Settings Fa Or if your machine supports a display screen or touch screen you can set it f
335. wer output of the wireless device or devices which may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device A Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed Therefore the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna Russia only T AB57 5 Appendix 156 Regulatory information Germany only Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Turkey only e RoHS EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This EEE is compliant with RoHS e Bu r n n ortalama ya am s resi 7 y l garanti suresi 2 yildir Thailand only Th
336. ws and Mac OS users only ll From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Device Settings gt Network Wi Fi Direct On Off Select On to enable Device Name Enter the printer s name for searching for your printer on a wireless network By default the device name is the model name IP Address Enter the IP address of the printer This IP address is used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless network We recommend using the default local IP address the default local IP address of the printer for Wi Fi Direct is 192 168 3 1 Group Owner Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi Fi Direct group s owner The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point We recommend activating this option Network Password If your printer is a Group Owner a Network Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your printer You can configure a network password yourself or can remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by default From the machine Machines with a display touch screen KA Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Menu overview on page 32 Select Menu gt Network gt Wi Fi gt Wi Fi Direct gt On Off gt On on the control panel Select amp Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Direct on the t
337. xit area Clear the jam see In the exit area on page 124 4 Troubleshooting Understanding display messages Toner related messages i Message Error error number Toner Cart Failure error number Call for service Error error number Toner Failure error number Install toner again Toner not installed Toner cartridge is not installed Meaning A toner cartridge is not installed Message Replace IMG unit Replace with new imaging unit Suggested solutions Reinstall the toner cartridge A toner cartridge is not being detected Reinstall the toner cartridge two or three times to confirm it is seated properly If the problem persists contact the service representatives Not removed protective film from toner Remove the protective film from the toner cartridge Meaning The indicated imaging unit has almost reached its estimated imaging unit life Suggested solutions e You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel If you select Stop the printer stops printing and you cannot print any more without changing the imaging unit If you select Continue the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed Replace the imaging unit for the best print quality when this message appears Using a imaging unit beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the imaging unit on page 100 e Ifthe machine stops pri
338. xt Click Wireless gt Wizard e2 If the wireless security setting window appears enter the registered password network password and click Next Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration However if you want to set the wireless network directly select Custom 9 The confirmation window appears please check your wireless setup If the setup is right click Apply ag 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 208 Wireless network setup a 10 Disconnect the network cable standard or network Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network In case of Ad hoc mode you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network Turning the Wi Fi network on off L If your machine has a display you can also turn on off the Wi Fi from the machine s control panel using the Network menu Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine If not connect the machine with a standard network cable Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password f
339. y and machine damage KU Illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on Carbon paper or carbon backed paper the model and options installed Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 Coated paper Onion skin or thin paper Wrinkled or creased paper On the scanner glass Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Using the scanner glass you can copy or scan originals You can get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder If an original is detected in the document feeder the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass Remove all staples and paper clips before loading Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents with other unusual characteristics 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Ey Media and tray 1 2 Lift and open the scanner lid Place the original face down on the scanner glass Align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass LTs Zs NG oe Close the scanner lid Qj Ww Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption l e Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the pri
340. y follow the user s guide provided with the machine Otherwise you could damage the machine 1 Introduction 18 Safety information Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire When storing consumables such as toner cartridges keep them away from children Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested e Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws e Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician Repair by non certified technicians could result in fire or electric shock e The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician Supply usage A Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested Using recycled consumables such as toner can cause damage to the machine In case of damage due to the use of recycled consumables a service fee will be charged For consumables that contain toner dust toner cartridge waste toner bottle imaging unit etc follow the instructions below When disposing of the consumables follow the instructions for disposal Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions Do not wash the consumables Fora waste toner bottle do not reuse it after emptying the bottle If you do not follow the instructions above it may cause machi
341. ze is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again The output tray is full Once the paper is removed from the output tray the machine resumes printing The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 64 Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen see Using help on page 65 A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application see Opening printing preferences on page 64 See the printer driver help screen see Using help on page 65 The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use see Opening printing preferences on page 64 6 Troubleshooting 340 Printing problems Cond

Samsung ProXpress

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents